WO2025040075A1 - Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method, and related apparatus - Google Patents
Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method, and related apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025040075A1 WO2025040075A1 PCT/CN2024/113289 CN2024113289W WO2025040075A1 WO 2025040075 A1 WO2025040075 A1 WO 2025040075A1 CN 2024113289 W CN2024113289 W CN 2024113289W WO 2025040075 A1 WO2025040075 A1 WO 2025040075A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- reference signal
- mode
- terminal device
- identifier
- tci state
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/22—Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
- H04W8/24—Transfer of terminal data
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a measurement result sending method, a measurement result receiving method and related devices.
- the fifth generation mobile communication system can use high-frequency communication, that is, use ultra-high frequency band (for example, 28GHz) signals to transmit data.
- a major problem with high-frequency communication is that the signal energy drops sharply with the transmission distance, resulting in a short signal transmission distance.
- high-frequency communication uses analog beam technology, which concentrates the signal energy within a smaller angle range by weighting the antenna array to form a signal similar to a light beam (called an analog beam, or beam for short), thereby increasing the transmission distance.
- an analog beam or beam for short
- the network device can configure two transmission configuration index (TCI) states for the terminal device, namely the downlink/joint TCI state (joint/DL TCI state) and the uplink TCI state (UL TCI state).
- TCI transmission configuration index
- the network device can configure the TCI mode currently used by the terminal device through radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and the TCI mode can be a joint mode or a separate mode.
- RRC radio resource control
- the TCI mode can be a joint mode or a separate mode.
- the network device indicates the downlink/joint TCI state to the terminal device, and the downlink/joint TCI state can be used for both uplink and downlink transmissions.
- the separate mode the network device indicates the downlink/joint TCI state and the uplink TCI state to the terminal device, and the downlink/joint TCI state is used for downlink transmission, and the UL TCI state is used for uplink transmission.
- the maximum permissible exposure is defined, that is, the MPE that specifies the field strength and power density of transmitters operating within a specific frequency range.
- MPE maximum permissible exposure
- the present application provides a measurement result sending method, a measurement result receiving method and a related device for sending measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, so as to trigger a terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or trigger a terminal device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or trigger a terminal device to switch a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) mode, or indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device.
- TCI transmission configuration indicator
- the first aspect of the present application provides a method for sending measurement results, which is executed by a terminal device.
- the terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module, or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- a terminal device when referring to a terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided in the present application, which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- the method is described as being executed by a terminal device.
- the method comprises:
- the terminal device measures one or more reference signal resources; the terminal device sends the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the terminal device can report the mode switching information when reporting the measurement result of the reference signal resource, so as to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or trigger the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or trigger the terminal device to switch the TCI mode, or indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device.
- This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the common mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the TCI mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through the radio resource control (RRC) signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. Reduce the switching delay to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- RRC radio resource control
- the second aspect of the present application provides a method for receiving measurement results, which is performed by a network device.
- the network device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the device or apparatus shown above, which is not specifically limited in this application. It should be noted that in this application, when referring to a network device, it may refer to the network device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the network device that completes the method provided in this application, which is not specifically limited in this application. In the second aspect and its possible implementation methods, the method is described as being performed by a network device. The method comprises:
- a network device receives measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from a terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device; or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the network device receives the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from the terminal device. This is conducive to triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch the TCI mode, or indicating the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the common mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the TCI mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. Reduce the switching delay to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- the mode switching information is indicated by a first field.
- the mode switching information is indicated by the first field.
- the terminal reports measurement information, and the measurement information includes measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information.
- the first field can be understood as a field in the measurement information.
- the mode switching information is included in the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources, and the first field can be understood as a field in the measurement results.
- the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information indicates to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode; or, when the value of the first field is the second value, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information indicates not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the common mode.
- Different meanings are indicated by different values of the first field. Quickly instructing the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode is achieved.
- the first field when the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the separate mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the common mode;
- the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate that the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device is not switched, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the common mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the separate mode.
- the length of the first field and the meaning indicated by the mode switching information indicated by the value of the first field are shown. This will facilitate the implementation of the plan.
- the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; or, the first value is 1, and the second value is 0.
- the terminal device can determine the reference signal for uplink transmission according to the identifier of one or more UL TCI states or the identifier of one or more reference signals, and then determine the transmit beam information of the uplink transmission.
- another implementation of the mode switching information is shown.
- the mode switching information is indicated by the second field.
- the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more UL TCI states, or to indicate the identifier of one or more reference signals.
- each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources.
- each UL TCI state identifier is associated with one of one or more reference signal resources, or each reference signal identifier is associated with one of one or more reference signal resources. This facilitates subsequent terminal devices to select appropriate UL TCI state identifiers or reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission in combination with the reference signal resources used in the downlink direction.
- the identifier of one or more reference signals is an index of the one or more reference signals in a measurement set; or, the identifier of one or more reference signals is a local identifier of one or more reference signals in a reference signal corresponding to one or more reference signal resources.
- the identification of one or more reference signals is a local identification of one or more reference signals in a reference signal corresponding to one or more reference signal resources. Since the one or more reference signal resources may be less than the number of reference signal resources in the measurement set, the bit length used to represent the local identification may be smaller. Therefore, this implementation is conducive to reducing the signaling overhead generated by the terminal device indicating the identification of the one or more reference signals.
- the mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields, and the one or more third fields correspond to part or all of the reference signal resources in one or more reference signal resources, and each third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
- Mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields.
- the third field indicates whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. This facilitates subsequent terminal devices to use appropriate uplink transmission reference signals for uplink transmission.
- the third field indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. Then the terminal device can consider using the reference signal for uplink transmission during subsequent uplink transmission.
- the length of the third field and the meanings indicated by various values of the third field are shown, thereby realizing the indication of the mode switching information.
- the method further includes: the network device sends a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the terminal device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode.
- the network device sends a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the terminal device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode.
- the terminal device is quickly switched to the separate mode without the network device reconfiguring the TCI mode
- the first MAC CE may also activate one or more TCI states. At least one of the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one of the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. This facilitates the subsequent indication of the corresponding TCI state from the activated TCI state, which is used to update the uplink beam adopted by the terminal device. The terminal device is switched to a separate mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
- the first MAC CE has at least one Pi field with a value of 1.
- the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI state activated by the first MAC CE has a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a detached mode.
- the first MAC CE has at least one downlink (D)/uplink (U) field with a value of 0.
- the D/U field indicates that the TCI state activated in the first MAC CE includes the UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state.
- the terminal device is implicitly instructed to switch to the common mode.
- the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0.
- the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI states activated by the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. Thus, the terminal device is implicitly instructed to switch to the common mode.
- the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1.
- the D/U field indicates that the TCI states activated in the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to the common mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a fourth field, and the fourth field is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode.
- the fourth field indicates that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode.
- the method further includes: the terminal device receives a second DCI from the network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among the one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or the first code point
- the corresponding TCI state includes a UL TCI state; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state in the two states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the terminal device receives the second DCI, and performs uplink transmission through the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point indicated by the second DCI. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to a separate mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
- the method further includes: the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
- the terminal device is instructed to use the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point for uplink transmission.
- the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to a separation mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state in the two states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point, including: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state.
- an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by a terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. Thereby, the solution is more comprehensive.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
- the method when the second field indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal; the method further includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal.
- the terminal device For the second field indicating an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, an implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the terminal device when the first condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal;
- the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the terminal device receives the confirmation message (acknowledgement, ACK) from the network device, ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources;
- the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission;
- the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, the terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the reference
- the implementation method of the terminal device using the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal indicated by the second field for uplink transmission is shown. This enables the terminal device to update the uplink beam and switch to the separation mode.
- the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the terminal device receives fourth indication information from the network device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal.
- the terminal device can receive the fourth indication information, and perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the first UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the first reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the partial bandwidth uplink indication (bandwidth partuplink dedicated, BWP-UplinkDedicated) configured by the network device for the terminal device.
- the partial bandwidth uplink indication bandwidth partuplink dedicated, BWP-UplinkDedicated
- the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method also includes: the network device sends a fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
- the terminal device it is convenient for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information.
- the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the second field indicates multiple UL TCI state identifiers or multiple reference signal identifiers; the method further includes: the terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device.
- an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by the terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the solution more comprehensive and rich.
- the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources; the method further includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- an implementation method for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the terminal device when the second condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to an identifier of a UL TCI state associated with a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or an identifier of an associated reference signal;
- the second condition includes at least one of the following: a first duration of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; the terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the UL TCI state identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode; or, a second duration of time has passed after the terminal device receives an ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information.
- the terminal device when the second condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal. This is conducive to the terminal device selecting a suitable reference signal for uplink transmission under the corresponding conditions.
- the method further includes: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal. The terminal device performs uplink transmission. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. It is convenient to implement the uplink transmission of the terminal device. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal, or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device.
- An implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by a terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the implementation of the solution richer.
- the terminal device when a third condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device;
- the third condition includes at least one of the following: a power backoff amount required by a beam corresponding to a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device due to MPE restriction exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
- the power backoff amount required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
- At least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
- At least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
- the above shows a possible condition for triggering the terminal device to send mode switching information, which is conducive to the terminal device to reasonably request switching to the separation mode under corresponding conditions, or to switch the terminal device to the separation mode, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device.
- the method further includes: the network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to report mode switching information, so that the terminal device reports the mode switching information when reporting the measurement result.
- the first configuration information is further used to configure the terminal device to report measurement results of one or more reference signal resources.
- the third aspect of the present application provides an information sending method, which is executed by a terminal device.
- the terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module, or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- a terminal device when referring to a terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided by the present application, which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- the method is described as being executed by a terminal device. The method comprises:
- the network device receives mode switching information from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each code point corresponding to one or two TCI states; one or At least one TCI code point among multiple code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, at least one TCI code point among one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state that includes a UL TCI state.
- the first MAC CE may also activate one or more TCI states.
- At least one code point among one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, at least one code point among one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state that includes a UL TCI state.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
- the first MAC CE has at least one Pi field with a value of 1.
- the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI state activated by the first MAC CE has a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separation mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
- At least one D/U field in the first MAC CE has a value of 0.
- the TCI state activated in the first MAC CE is indicated by the D/U field, including the UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode.
- This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
- the method further includes: the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
- the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
- instructing the terminal device to use the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point for uplink transmission.
- the terminal device can update the uplink beam and enable the terminal device to switch to the separation mode.
- the method when the mode switching information includes a UL TCI state identifier, or includes a reference signal identifier; the method also includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the terminal device when the first condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal;
- the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first duration of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; a second duration of time has passed after the terminal device receives an ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information;
- the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission;
- the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier corresponding to one
- the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device.
- an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by the terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the solution more comprehensive and rich.
- the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the terminal device receives fourth indication information from the network device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal. This facilitates the terminal device to perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. This enables the terminal device to update the uplink beam and switch the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
- the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
- the mode switching information includes multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or includes multiple reference signal identifiers; the method further includes: the terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources, or the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers; the method also includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the terminal device when the second condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal;
- the second condition includes one or more of the following: after the first time period has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; the terminal device receives the fifth indication information from the network device, the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, after the second time period has passed after the terminal device receives the ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device successfully receives the mode switching information.
- the implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the method further includes: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is one of the one or more reference signal resources.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission.
- the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. It is convenient to implement the uplink transmission of the terminal device. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
- the first signaling is a power headroom report media access control control element (PHR MAC CE), and there is an R field in each byte where the field for indicating the reference signal resource in the PHR MAC CE is located, and the R field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the PHR MAC CE reports the mode switching information to provide a bearer without defining new signaling.
- the R field in the PHR MAC CE can also indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier. Thereby, the indication of the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier associated with each reference signal resource is achieved.
- the value of the R field when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the first signaling is a PHR MAC CE
- the Pi field in the PHR MAC CE is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i in one or more reference signal resources is associated with the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal.
- a bearer is provided by reporting mode switching information through the PHR MAC CE, without defining new signaling.
- the Pi field in the PHR MAC CE can also be used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i is associated with the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal. Thereby, the indication of the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal associated with each reference signal resource is realized.
- the value of the Pi field when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; or, when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the first signaling also includes a second field, and the second field is used to indicate whether the first signaling includes a UL TCI status identifier or a reference signal identifier.
- the first signaling further includes a third field
- the third field is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
- the terminal device is displayed to indicate that it is switched to the separate mode.
- the first signaling also includes one or more fourth fields, and the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more TCI state identifiers; each fourth field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
- the terminal device when a first condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device;
- the first condition includes at least one of the following: a power backoff amount required by a beam corresponding to a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device due to MPE restriction exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
- the power backoff amount required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
- At least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
- At least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
- the above shows a possible condition for triggering the terminal device to send mode switching information, which is conducive to the terminal device to reasonably request switching to the separation mode under corresponding conditions, or to switch the terminal device to the separation mode, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device.
- the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for reporting measurement results of the terminal device, or reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE, or any reference signal resource in a configured reference signal resource set.
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state; and perform uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
- the fifth aspect of the present application provides a first communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the first communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the first communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the fifth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the first communication device is used as an example for description. Including:
- a processing module configured to measure one or more reference signal resources
- a transceiver module is used to send the measurement results and mode switching information of the one or more reference signal resources, wherein the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the sixth aspect of the present application provides a second communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- a second communication device when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the second communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the second communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application.
- the second communication device is taken as an example for description. Including:
- a transceiver module is used to receive measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from a first communication device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device; or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the mode switching information is indicated by a first field.
- the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information indicates switching the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device adopts the separate mode; or, when the value of the first field is a second value, the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information indicates not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device adopts the common mode.
- the first field when the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate The first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate switching of the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the common mode;
- the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate that the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device is not switched, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the common mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode.
- the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; or, the first value is 1, and the second value is 0.
- the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode;
- the mode switching information is indicated by a second field, and the second field is used to indicate one or more UL TCI state identifiers, or the second field is used to indicate one or more reference signal identifiers.
- one or more UL TCI state identifiers or one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index selected by the first communication device for uplink transmission.
- each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources.
- the identifier of one or more reference signals is an index of the one or more reference signals in the measurement set; or, the identifier of one or more reference signals is a local identifier of one or more reference signals in the reference signals corresponding to one or more reference signal resources.
- the mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields, and the one or more third fields correspond to part or all of the reference signal resources in one or more reference signal resources, and each third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
- the value of the third field when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; or,
- the value of the third field When the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive a first MAC CE or a first DCI from the second communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the first communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
- the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt the separate mode; the first MAC CE is further used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, and each code point corresponds to one or two TCI states; At least one of the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or at least one of the one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state including a UL TCI state.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state.
- the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0.
- the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a fourth field, and the fourth field is used to indicate that the first communication device switches from a common mode to a separate mode.
- the transceiver module is also used to receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the two states corresponding to the first code point, or, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state.
- the processing module when the second field indicates an UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier; the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the processing module is specifically used to: when a first condition is met, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier;
- the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources;
- the first communication device receives first indication information from the second communication device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device uses the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier for uplink transmission;
- the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device switches to a separate mode; or, the first communication device receives third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference
- the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive fourth indication information from the second communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals
- the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal.
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the first UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission by using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the first reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission by using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
- the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the transceiver module is also used to: send fourth indication information to the first communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
- the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or multiple reference signals.
- the processing module is also used for: using one of the UL TCI state identifiers or one of the reference signal identifiers in the multiple UL TCI state identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule.
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
- the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device is one of one or more reference signal resources; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- uplink transmission is performed according to an identifier of a UL TCI state associated with a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device or an identifier of an associated reference signal;
- the second condition includes at least one of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information; the first communication device receives fifth indication information from the second communication device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to use the UL TCI state identifier or the associated reference signal identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for uplink transmission; the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to switch to the separation mode; or, a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information.
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send third indication information to the first communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for uplink transmission by the first communication device.
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
- the transceiver module is further used to: when a third condition is met, send mode switching information to the second communication device; the third condition includes at least one of the following: the power backoff amount required by the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission is limited by MPE exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
- the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device there is at least one reference signal resource whose corresponding beam has a power backoff amount exceeding XdB due to MPE restriction;
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
- At least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restriction
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission; or,
- At least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
- the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for the first communication device to report measurement results.
- the transceiver module is further used to: receive first configuration information from the second communication device, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to report mode switching information.
- the transceiver module is further used to: send the first configuration information to the first communication device,
- the configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to report mode switching information.
- the first configuration information is also used to configure the first communication device to report measurement results of one or more reference signal resources.
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state; and perform uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
- the seventh aspect of the present application provides a first communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the first communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the first communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the seventh aspect and its possible implementation methods, the first communication device is taken as an example for description. Including:
- a processing module configured to determine mode switching information, wherein the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device is to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device is to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is a common mode or a separate mode;
- the transceiver module is used to send mode switching information.
- the eighth aspect of the present application provides a second communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the second communication device, it may refer to the second communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the second communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the eighth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the second communication device is described as an example. Including:
- a transceiver module is used to receive mode switching information from a first communication device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the mode switching information includes one or more UL TCI state identifiers, and the one or more UL TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the first communication device; or, the mode switching information includes one or more reference signal identifiers, and the one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the first communication device.
- the mode switching information is carried in the first signaling.
- the first signaling includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or includes one or more TCI state identifiers, and the one or more reference signal resource identifiers or one or more TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the downlink transmission of the first communication device.
- each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers.
- the transceiver module is further used to: receive a first MAC CE or a first DCI from the second communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. Used to indicate that the first communication device adopts a separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts a common mode.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the first communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
- the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each code point corresponding to one or two TCI states; at least one TCI code point among the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one TCI code point among the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, and the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state.
- the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0.
- the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a first field, and the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device switches from a common mode to a separate mode.
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the two states corresponding to the first code point, or, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state.
- the processing module when the mode switching information includes a UL TCI state identifier, or includes a reference signal identifier; the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the processing module is specifically used to: when a first condition is met, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier;
- the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information;
- the first communication device receives first indication information from the second communication device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device uses the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier for uplink transmission;
- the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device switches to a separate mode; or, the first communication device receives third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state
- the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
- the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or includes multiple
- the transceiver module is also used to: receive fourth indication information from the second communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier.
- the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the transceiver module is also used to: send fourth indication information to the first communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
- the mode switching information includes multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or includes multiple reference signal identifiers; the processing module is also used to: use one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to preset rules.
- the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device is one of one or more reference signal resources, or the TCI state currently used by the first communication device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the processing module is specifically used to: when the second condition is met, uplink transmission is performed according to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the UL TCI state identifier associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal;
- the second condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information;
- the first communication device receives fifth indication information from the second communication device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to use the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the UL TCI state identifier associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission;
- the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to switch to the separation mode; or, after a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information
- the transceiver module is also used to: send third indication information to the first communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for uplink transmission by the first communication device.
- the first signaling is PHR MAC CE, and there is an R field in each byte where the field for indicating the reference signal resource in the PHR MAC CE is located, and the R field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI status identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the value of the R field when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the first signaling is PHR MAC CE
- the Pi field in PHR MAC CE is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i in one or more reference signal resources is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the value of the Pi field when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; or, when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- At least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
- the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for reporting measurement results by the first communication device, or reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE, or any reference signal resource in a configured reference signal resource set.
- the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
- a communication device comprising: a processor and a memory.
- the memory stores a computer program or a computer instruction
- the processor is used to call and run the computer program or the computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
- the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising a processor.
- the processor is used to call a computer program or computer instruction stored therein, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
- the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
- a communication device which includes a processor, and the processor is used to execute any one of the implementation methods of any one of the first to fourth aspects.
- a twelfth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, characterized in that when it is run on a computer, it enables the computer to execute any implementation method of any one of the first to fourth aspects.
- a thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer instructions, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
- the present application provides a chip device, comprising a processor, for calling a computer program or computer instruction in the memory so that the processor executes any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects described above.
- the processor is coupled to the memory via an interface.
- the present application provides a communication system, which includes a terminal device and a network device; the terminal device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the first aspect, and the network device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the second aspect; or, the terminal The device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the third aspect, and the network device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the fourth aspect.
- the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is a common mode or a separate mode.
- the terminal device can report the mode switching information when reporting the measurement results of the reference signal resources, thereby triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode.
- This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode or the common mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, reducing the switching delay, and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 is another schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3A is a format diagram of a MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3B is a format diagram of PHR MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a method for sending measurement results and a method for receiving measurement results according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG6 is another format diagram of PHR MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 is another format diagram of the PHR MAC CE according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG12 is another schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG13 is another schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a base station according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the embodiments of the present application provide an information sending method, an information receiving method and a related device, which are used to send measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, thereby triggering a terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or triggering a terminal device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode. It is not necessary for a network device to configure a terminal device to switch to a separate mode or a common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- 5G system new radio (NR) system
- LTE long term evolution
- LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system
- LTE time division duplex (TDD) system LTE time division duplex (UMTS)
- UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
- 5G network for example, 6G mobile communication system
- V2X vehicle to everything
- the communication system to which the present application is applicable includes a network device and a terminal device, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using beams.
- the terminal device and network device of this application are introduced below.
- the terminal device may be a wireless terminal device capable of receiving network device scheduling information and indication information.
- the terminal device may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
- Terminal equipment also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), customer premise equipment (CPE), etc.
- Terminal equipment is equipment that includes wireless communication functions (providing voice/data connectivity to users).
- handheld devices with wireless connection functions or vehicle-mounted devices, etc.
- terminal devices are: mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (AR) devices, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in Internet of Vehicles, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes.
- the wireless terminal in self-driving can be a drone, a helicopter, or an airplane.
- the wireless terminal in Internet of Vehicles can be a vehicle-mounted device, a vehicle-mounted device, a vehicle-mounted module, a vehicle, or a ship.
- the wireless terminal in industrial control can be a camera, a robot, or a robotic arm.
- the wireless terminals in a smart home can be TVs, air conditioners, vacuum cleaners, speakers, or set-top boxes.
- the terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the device or apparatus shown above, and this application does not limit it. It should be noted that in this application, when referring to the terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to the chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided in this application, and this application does not limit it.
- the terminal device when the first condition is met, sends mode switching information to the network device.
- the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
- the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state of the two TCI states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- the TCI state corresponding to the first code point also includes a DL TCI state.
- the terminal device performs downlink transmission according to the DL TCI state.
- the above step 803 specifically includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters (ul-powerControl) and path loss reference signal (pathlossReferenceRS) associated with the UL TCI state.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters (ul-powerControl) and path loss reference signal (pathlossReferenceRS) associated with the UL TCI state.
- ul-powerControl uplink power control parameters
- pathlossReferenceRS path loss reference signal
- the terminal device performs uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
- FIG9 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG9 , the method includes:
- the mode switching information indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal.
- the implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is introduced below in combination with step 901.
- the terminal device When the mode switching information indicates a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
- the terminal device when the first condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal.
- a first duration has passed.
- the first duration is K microseconds, X time slots, or M time domain symbols.
- K, X, and M are all integers greater than or equal to 1.
- K is 3, X is 1, and M is 2.
- the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier for uplink transmission.
- the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode.
- the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources.
- the TCI state is used by the terminal device for downlink transmission, that is, the TCI state is used to indicate the corresponding downlink beam.
- the above step 901 specifically includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal indicating the mode switching information; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication (BWP-UplinkDedicated) configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
- BWP-UplinkDedicated BWP uplink indication
- the mode switching information indicates multiple UL TCI state identifiers or multiple reference signal identifiers.
- the present application provides two possible implementation methods for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission.
- the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device.
- the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the fourth indication information from the network device.
- the identifier of the first UL TCI state is the identifier of the UL TCI state with the largest or smallest identifier among the multiple UL TCI states, which is not specifically limited in this application.
- the identifier of the first reference signal is the identifier of the reference signal with the largest or smallest identifier among the multiple reference signals, which is not specifically limited in this application.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal.
- step 904 to implement method 2.
- the terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule.
- the preset rule includes that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state that identifies the smallest or largest UL TCI state among the multiple UL TCI states for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the identifier of the reference signal that identifies the smallest or largest reference signal among the multiple reference signals for uplink transmission.
- the terminal device can also use other preset rules to select the corresponding UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier for uplink transmission, which is not specifically limited in this application.
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 above shows a case where the mode switching information indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, and shows the implementation process of the terminal device performing uplink transmission.
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 above also shows a case where the mode switching information indicates multiple identifiers of UL TCI states or multiple identifiers of reference signals, and shows the implementation process of the terminal device performing uplink transmission. This enables the terminal device to quickly switch to the separation mode and update the uplink beam used by the terminal device. This improves the transmission performance of the terminal device and avoids affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG10 , the method includes:
- the mode switching information indicates one or more UL TCI state identifiers, or one or more reference signal identifiers.
- each UL TCI state identifier in the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource.
- each reference signal identifier in the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource.
- each UL TCI state in the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier.
- each reference signal identifier in the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier.
- the present application provides two possible implementation methods for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 4 above; or, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of the reference signal resources corresponding to one or more reference signal resource identifiers included in the first signaling of the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above; or, the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers included in the first signaling in the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above; or, the reference signal resource in the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 4 above; or, the reference signal resource in the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above.
- the terminal device when the second condition is met, performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the second condition includes one or more of the following:
- a first time period has passed.
- the first time period please refer to the above related introduction.
- the terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device.
- the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission.
- the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode.
- the terminal device After the terminal device receives the ACK from the network device, a second period of time has passed.
- the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information.
- the above step 1001 specifically includes: the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
- the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device.
- the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state.
- the terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device.
- the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources.
- the TCI state is used for downlink transmission by the terminal device, that is, the TCI state is used to indicate the corresponding downlink beam.
- the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
- the reference signal resource is a reference signal resource including an identifier of a reference signal in a TCI state indicated by third indication information among the one or more reference signal resources.
- the above step 1003 specifically includes: the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
- FIG. 10 above shows the implementation process of uplink transmission by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can quickly switch to the separation mode and update the uplink beam used by the terminal device, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device and avoiding the impact on the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
- the communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application is described below.
- Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device can be used to execute the process executed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments shown in Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 8 to Fig. 10.
- the relevant introduction in the above method embodiment please refer to the relevant introduction in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1100 includes a transceiver module 1101 and a processing module 1102 .
- the processing module 1102 is used for data processing.
- the transceiver module 1101 can realize the corresponding communication function.
- the transceiver module 1101 can also be called a communication interface or a communication module.
- the communication device 1100 may further include a storage module, which may be used to store instructions and/or data.
- the processing module 1102 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage module so that the communication device implements the aforementioned method embodiment.
- the communication device module 1100 can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1100 can be a terminal device or a component that can be configured in a terminal device.
- the processing module 1102 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 1101 is used to perform the reception-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 1101 may include a sending module and a receiving module.
- the sending module is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment.
- the receiving module is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1100 may include a sending module but not a receiving module.
- the communication device 1100 may include a receiving module but not a sending module. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device 1100 includes a sending action and a receiving action.
- the communication device 1100 is used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10.
- the communication device 1100 is used to perform the following scheme:
- the processing module 1102 is configured to measure one or more reference signal resources
- the transceiver module 1101 is used to send measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the communication device 1100 is used to execute the following solution:
- the processing module 1102 is used to determine mode switching information, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 Requesting to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100; or, the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, and the TCI mode is the common mode or the separate mode;
- the transceiver module 1101 is used to send mode switching information.
- the processing module 1102 in the above embodiment can be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuit.
- the transceiver module 1101 can be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
- the transceiver module 1101 can also be called a communication module or a communication interface.
- the storage module can be implemented by at least one memory.
- Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device can be used to execute the process executed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 8 to Fig. 10.
- the relevant introduction in the above method embodiments please refer to the relevant introduction in the above method embodiments.
- the communication device 1200 includes a transceiver module 1201. Optionally, the communication device 1200 also includes a processing module 1202.
- the transceiver module 1201 can implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing module 1202 is used for data processing.
- the transceiver module 1201 can also be called a communication interface or a communication module.
- the communication device 1200 may further include a storage module, which may be used to store instructions and/or data.
- the processing module 1202 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage module so that the communication device implements the aforementioned method embodiment.
- the communication device module 1200 can be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1200 can be a network device or a component that can be configured in a network device.
- the transceiver module 1201 is used to perform the reception-related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment, and the processing module 1202 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment.
- the transceiver module 1201 may include a sending module and a receiving module.
- the sending module is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment.
- the receiving module is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1200 may include a sending module but not a receiving module.
- the communication device 1200 may include a receiving module but not a sending module. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device 1200 includes a sending action and a receiving action.
- the communication device 1200 is used to perform the actions performed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10.
- the communication device 1200 is used to perform the following scheme:
- the transceiver module 1201 is used to receive measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the communication device 1200 is used to execute the following solution:
- the transceiver module 1201 is used to receive mode switching information from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
- the processing module 1202 in the above embodiment can be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuit.
- the transceiver module 1201 can be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit.
- the transceiver module 1201 can also be called a communication module or a communication interface.
- the storage module can be implemented by at least one memory.
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1300.
- the communication device 1300 includes a processor 1310, the processor 1310 is coupled to a memory 1320, the memory 1320 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor 1310 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1320, so that the method in the above method embodiment is executed.
- the communication device 1300 includes one or more processors 1310.
- the communication device 1300 may further include a memory 1320 .
- the communication device 1300 may include one or more memories 1320 .
- the memory 1320 may be integrated with the processor 1310 or provided separately.
- the communication device 1300 may further include a transceiver 1330, and the transceiver 1330 is used for receiving and/or sending signals.
- the processor 1310 is used to control the transceiver 1330 to receive and/or send signals.
- the communication device 1300 is used to implement the operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the processor 1310 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment
- the transceiver 1330 is used to implement the sending and receiving-related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1300 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the processor 1310 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment
- the transceiver 1330 is used to implement the sending and receiving-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
- the present application also provides a communication device 1400, which may be a terminal device, a processor of the terminal device, or a chip.
- the communication device 1400 may be used to execute the operations executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
- the memory can store computer program codes
- the transceiver includes a transmitter 1431, a receiver 1432, a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), an antenna 1433, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
- the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, as well as to control terminal devices, execute software programs, process software program data, etc.
- the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
- the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals.
- the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- Input and output devices For example, touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc. are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
- the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit.
- the RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
- the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
- the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- FIG14 only one memory, processor, and transceiver are shown in FIG14. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc.
- the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
- the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the transceiver module of the terminal device, and the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processing module of the terminal device.
- the terminal device includes a processor 1410, a memory 1420, and a transceiver 1430.
- the processor 1410 may also be referred to as a processing unit, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, etc.
- the transceiver 1430 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
- the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver 1430 may be regarded as a receiving module, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver 1430 may be regarded as a transmitting module, that is, the transceiver 1430 includes a receiver and a transmitter.
- a transceiver may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver module, or a transceiver circuit, etc.
- a receiver may sometimes be referred to as a receiver, a receiving module, or a receiving circuit, etc.
- a transmitter may sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitting module, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
- the processor 1410 is used to perform the processing actions on the terminal device side in the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10, and the transceiver 1430 is used to perform the transceiver actions on the terminal device side in the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10.
- the processor 1410 is used to perform step 401 in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
- the transceiver 1430 is used to perform step 402 in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
- the transceiver 1430 is also used to perform steps 401a to 401c in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
- FIG. 14 is merely an example and not a limitation, and the terminal device including the transceiver module and the processing module may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 14 .
- the chip When the communication device 1400 is a chip, the chip includes a processor, a memory and a transceiver.
- the transceiver may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
- the processor may be a processing module or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- the sending operation of the terminal device in the example can be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the terminal device in the above method embodiment can be understood as the input of the chip.
- the present application also provides a communication device 1500, which can be a network device or a chip.
- the communication device 1500 can be used to perform the operations performed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 8 to FIG. 10.
- FIG. 15 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the base station structure.
- the base station includes parts 1510, 1520 and 1530.
- Part 1510 is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling the base station, etc.;
- Part 1510 is usually the control center of the base station, which can be usually called a processor, and is used to control the base station to perform the processing operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment.
- Part 1520 is mainly used to store computer program codes and data.
- Part 1530 is mainly used for receiving and transmitting radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals into baseband signals; Part 1530 can usually be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc.
- the transceiver module of part 1530 can also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., which includes an antenna 1533 and a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), wherein the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
- the device for implementing the receiving function in part 1530 may be regarded as a receiver, and the device for implementing the transmitting function may be regarded as a transmitter, that is, part 1530 includes a receiver 1532 and a transmitter 1531.
- the receiver may also be referred to as a receiving module, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc.
- the transmitter may be referred to as a transmitting module, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
- Part 1510 and part 1520 may include one or more single boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the processor is used to read and execute the program in the memory to realize the baseband processing function and the control of the base station. If there are multiple single boards, each single board can be interconnected to enhance the processing capability. As an optional implementation, multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processors at the same time.
- the transceiver module of part 1530 is used to execute the transceiver-related process executed by the network device in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
- the processor of part 1510 is used to execute the processing-related process executed by the network device in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
- FIG. 15 is merely an example and not a limitation, and the network device including the processor, memory, and transceiver may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 15 .
- the chip When the communication device 1500 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver, a memory and a processor.
- the transceiver may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
- the processor may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- the sending operation of the network device in the above method embodiment may be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the network device in the above method embodiment may be understood as the input of the chip.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which computer instructions for implementing the method executed by a terminal device or a network device in the above method embodiment are stored.
- the computer when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method performed by the terminal device or the network device in the above method embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed by a computer, enables the computer to implement the method executed by a terminal device or a network device in the above method embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device in the above embodiment and the network device in the above embodiment.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip device, including a processor, for calling a computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory so that the processor executes the method provided in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above.
- the input of the chip device corresponds to the receiving operation in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above
- the output of the chip device corresponds to the sending operation in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above.
- the processor is coupled to the memory via an interface.
- the chip device further comprises a memory, in which computer programs or computer instructions are stored.
- the processor mentioned in any of the above places may be a general-purpose central processing unit, a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the method provided in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10.
- the memory mentioned in any of the above places may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM), etc.
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
- the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the part that essentially contributes to the technical solution of the present application or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as USB flash drives, mobile hard drives, ROM, RAM, magnetic disks, or optical disks.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2023年8月22日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202311063058.6、申请名称为“测量结果发送方法、测量结果接收方法以及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on August 22, 2023, with application number 202311063058.6 and application name “Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method and related device”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种测量结果发送方法、测量结果接收方法以及相关装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a measurement result sending method, a measurement result receiving method and related devices.
第五代移动通信系统(5th generation,5G)可以采用高频通信,即采用超高频段(例如,28GHz)信号传输数据。高频通信的一个主要问题是信号能量随传输距离急剧下降,导致信号传输距离短。为了克服该问题,高频通信采用模拟波束技术,通过对天线阵列进行加权处理,将信号能量集中在一个较小的角度范围内,形成一个类似于光束一样的信号(称为模拟波束,简称为波束),从而提高传输距离。网络设备和终端设备都要采用波束进行传输。The fifth generation mobile communication system (5G) can use high-frequency communication, that is, use ultra-high frequency band (for example, 28GHz) signals to transmit data. A major problem with high-frequency communication is that the signal energy drops sharply with the transmission distance, resulting in a short signal transmission distance. To overcome this problem, high-frequency communication uses analog beam technology, which concentrates the signal energy within a smaller angle range by weighting the antenna array to form a signal similar to a light beam (called an analog beam, or beam for short), thereby increasing the transmission distance. Both network equipment and terminal equipment use beams for transmission.
在第17个发布版本(release17,R17)中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置两种传输配置编号(transmission configuration index,TCI)状态,分别为下行/共同TCI状态(joint/DL TCI state),以及上行TCI状态(UL TCI state)。网络设备可以通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令配置终端设备当前使用的TCI模式,该TCI模式可以是共同模式或分离模式。在共同模式下,网络设备向终端设备指示的下行/共同TCI状态,该下行/共同TCI状态可同时用于上下行传输。在分离模式下,网络设备向终端设备指示下行/共同TCI状态和上行TCI状态,该下行/共同TCI状态用于下行传输,该UL TCI状态用于上行传输。In the 17th release (release17, R17), the network device can configure two transmission configuration index (TCI) states for the terminal device, namely the downlink/joint TCI state (joint/DL TCI state) and the uplink TCI state (UL TCI state). The network device can configure the TCI mode currently used by the terminal device through radio resource control (RRC) signaling, and the TCI mode can be a joint mode or a separate mode. In the joint mode, the network device indicates the downlink/joint TCI state to the terminal device, and the downlink/joint TCI state can be used for both uplink and downlink transmissions. In the separate mode, the network device indicates the downlink/joint TCI state and the uplink TCI state to the terminal device, and the downlink/joint TCI state is used for downlink transmission, and the UL TCI state is used for uplink transmission.
目前,考虑到电磁波对人体的辐射等,定义了最大允许暴露(maximum permissible exposure,MPE),即规定了在特定频率范围内运行的发射机的场强和功率密度的MPE。当网络设备配置终端设备使用共同模式,终端设备采用的上行波束和下行波束相同。当终端设备发生旋转、姿态变化或手持终端设备的姿势变化,由于MPE的限制,导致信号质量较好的上行波束和下行波束不一致。如果网络设备需要通过RRC信令重新配置终端设备采用分离模式,那么配置时延较大,影响终端设备的传输效率。因此,如何快速实现终端设备切换到分离模式,是值得考虑的问题。At present, considering the radiation of electromagnetic waves to the human body, the maximum permissible exposure (MPE) is defined, that is, the MPE that specifies the field strength and power density of transmitters operating within a specific frequency range. When the network device configures the terminal device to use the common mode, the uplink beam and downlink beam used by the terminal device are the same. When the terminal device rotates, the posture changes, or the posture of the handheld terminal device changes, the uplink beam and downlink beam with better signal quality are inconsistent due to the limitation of MPE. If the network device needs to reconfigure the terminal device to use the separation mode through RRC signaling, the configuration delay is large, affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device. Therefore, how to quickly switch the terminal device to the separation mode is a problem worth considering.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种测量结果发送方法、测量结果接收方法以及相关装置,用于发送一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,从而有利于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者触发终端设备切换传输配置编号状态(transmission configuration indicator,TCI)模式,或者指示终端设备采用的TCI模式。无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。The present application provides a measurement result sending method, a measurement result receiving method and a related device for sending measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, so as to trigger a terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or trigger a terminal device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or trigger a terminal device to switch a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) mode, or indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. It is not necessary for a network device to configure a terminal device to switch to a separate mode or a common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
本申请第一方面提供一种测量结果发送方法,该方法由终端设备执行,终端设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块、或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到终端设备时,既可以指终端设备本身,也可以指终端设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第一方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。方法包括:The first aspect of the present application provides a method for sending measurement results, which is executed by a terminal device. The terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module, or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to a terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided in the present application, which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the first aspect and its possible implementation methods, the method is described as being executed by a terminal device. The method comprises:
终端设备测量一个或多个参考信号资源;终端设备发送该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。 The terminal device measures one or more reference signal resources; the terminal device sends the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
上述技术方案中,终端设备可以在上报参考信号资源的测量结果时上报模式切换信息,从而有利于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者触发终端设备切换TCI模式,或者指示终端设备采用的TCI模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,或实现终端设备快速切换到共同模式,或实现终端设备快速切换TCI模式,无需网络设备通过无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,减少RRC重配时延。降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。In the above technical solution, the terminal device can report the mode switching information when reporting the measurement result of the reference signal resource, so as to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or trigger the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or trigger the terminal device to switch the TCI mode, or indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the common mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the TCI mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through the radio resource control (RRC) signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. Reduce the switching delay to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
本申请第二方面提供一种测量结果接收方法,该方法由网络设备执行,网络设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到网络设备时,既可以指网络设备本身,也可以指网络设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第二方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该方法由网络设备执行为例进行描述。方法包括:The second aspect of the present application provides a method for receiving measurement results, which is performed by a network device. The network device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the device or apparatus shown above, which is not specifically limited in this application. It should be noted that in this application, when referring to a network device, it may refer to the network device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the network device that completes the method provided in this application, which is not specifically limited in this application. In the second aspect and its possible implementation methods, the method is described as being performed by a network device. The method comprises:
网络设备接收来自终端设备的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。A network device receives measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from a terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device; or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
上述技术方案中,网络设备接收来自终端设备的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。从而有利于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者触发终端设备切换TCI模式,或者指示终端设备采用的TCI模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,或实现终端设备快速切换到共同模式,或实现终端设备快速切换TCI模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,减少RRC重配时延。降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。In the above technical solution, the network device receives the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from the terminal device. This is conducive to triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch the TCI mode, or indicating the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the common mode, or realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the TCI mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. Reduce the switching delay to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息通过第一字段指示。在该实现方式中,通过第一字段指示模式切换信息。例如,终端上报测量信息,测量信息包括一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。那么第一字段可以理解为测量信息中的一个字段。再例如,该模式切换信息包含于一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果中,第一字段可以理解为测量结果中的一个字段。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information is indicated by a first field. In this implementation, the mode switching information is indicated by the first field. For example, the terminal reports measurement information, and the measurement information includes measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information. Then the first field can be understood as a field in the measurement information. For another example, the mode switching information is included in the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources, and the first field can be understood as a field in the measurement results.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第一字段的取值为第一值时,则模式切换信息指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用分离模式;或者,当第一字段的取值为第二值时,则模式切换信息指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息指示不切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用共同模式。从而通过第一字段的不同取值来指示不同的含义。实现快速指示终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, when the value of the first field is the first value, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information indicates to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode; or, when the value of the first field is the second value, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information indicates not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the common mode. Different meanings are indicated by different values of the first field. Quickly instructing the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode is achieved.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第一字段的取值为0时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示终端设备采用分离模式;当第一字段的取值为1时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于指示不切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示终端设备采用共同模式;Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the separate mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the common mode;
或者,or,
当第一字段的取值为0时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于指示不切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示终端设备采用共同模式;当第一字段的取值为1时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示终端设备采用分离模式。When the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate that the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device is not switched, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the common mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the separate mode.
在该实现方式中,示出了第一字段的长度以及通过第一字段的取值指示模式切换信息所指示的含义。 从而有利于方案的实现。In this implementation, the length of the first field and the meaning indicated by the mode switching information indicated by the value of the first field are shown. This will facilitate the implementation of the plan.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一值为0,第二值为1;或者,第一值为1,第二值为0。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; or, the first value is 1, and the second value is 0.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用分离模式;模式切换信息通过第二字段指示,第二字段用于指示一个或多个上行传输配置编号(uplink transmission configuration index,UL TCI)状态的标识,或第二字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号的标识。可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识或该一个或多个参考信号的标识用于指示终端设备选择进行上行传输的参考信息索引。可以理解为,终端设备可以根据一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识或一个或多个参考信号的标识确定进行上行传输的参考信号,进而确定上行传输的发送波束信息。在该实现方式中,示出了模式切换信息的另外一种实现方式。通过第二字段指示模式切换信息。而第二字段用于指示一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或指示一个或多个参考信号的标识。从而隐式指示或间接指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者指示终端设备采用分离模式。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts the separate mode; the mode switching information is indicated by the second field, and the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more uplink transmission configuration indexes (UL TCI) states, or the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more reference signals. Optionally, the identifier of the one or more UL TCI states or the identifier of the one or more reference signals are used to indicate the reference information index selected by the terminal device for uplink transmission. It can be understood that the terminal device can determine the reference signal for uplink transmission according to the identifier of one or more UL TCI states or the identifier of one or more reference signals, and then determine the transmit beam information of the uplink transmission. In this implementation, another implementation of the mode switching information is shown. The mode switching information is indicated by the second field. The second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more UL TCI states, or to indicate the identifier of one or more reference signals. Thereby implicitly indicating or indirectly indicating that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or instructs the terminal device to adopt the separate mode.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources.
在该实现方式中,每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源,或者,每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源。从而有利于后续终端设备结合下行方向所采用的参考信号资源选择合适的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。In this implementation, each UL TCI state identifier is associated with one of one or more reference signal resources, or each reference signal identifier is associated with one of one or more reference signal resources. This facilitates subsequent terminal devices to select appropriate UL TCI state identifiers or reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission in combination with the reference signal resources used in the downlink direction.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个参考信号的标识是测量集合中的所述一个或多个参考信号的索引;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号在一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的局部标识。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the identifier of one or more reference signals is an index of the one or more reference signals in a measurement set; or, the identifier of one or more reference signals is a local identifier of one or more reference signals in a reference signal corresponding to one or more reference signal resources.
在该实现方式中,示出了一个或多个参考信号的标识的两种可能的实现方式,从而提升丰富方案的实现。另外,一个或多个参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号在一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的局部标识。由于该一个或多个参考信号资源可以少于测量集合中的参考信号资源的个数,因此用于表示局部标识的比特长度可以较小。因此,该实现方式有利于降低终端设备指示该一个或多个参考信号的标识产生的信令开销。In this implementation, two possible implementations of the identification of one or more reference signals are shown, thereby improving the implementation of the enriched solution. In addition, the identification of one or more reference signals is a local identification of one or more reference signals in a reference signal corresponding to one or more reference signal resources. Since the one or more reference signal resources may be less than the number of reference signal resources in the measurement set, the bit length used to represent the local identification may be smaller. Therefore, this implementation is conducive to reducing the signaling overhead generated by the terminal device indicating the identification of the one or more reference signals.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息通过一个或多个第三字段指示,一个或多个第三字段与一个或多个参考信号资源中的部分或全部参考信号资源对应,每个第三字段用于指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, the mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields, and the one or more third fields correspond to part or all of the reference signal resources in one or more reference signal resources, and each third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
在该实现方式中,示出了模式切换信息的另一种实现方式。通过一个或多个第三字段指示模式切换信息。从而实现第三字段指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。这样便于后续终端设备采用合适的上行传输的参考信号进行上行传输。例如,第三字段指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号。那么终端设备在后续上行传输的过程中可以考虑采用该参考信号进行上行传输。In this implementation, another implementation of mode switching information is shown. Mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields. Thereby, the third field indicates whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. This facilitates subsequent terminal devices to use appropriate uplink transmission reference signals for uplink transmission. For example, the third field indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. Then the terminal device can consider using the reference signal for uplink transmission during subsequent uplink transmission.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第三字段的取值为1,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号不能够作为上行传输的参考信号;当第三字段的取值为0,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号;或者,Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; or,
当第三字段的取值为0,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号不能够作为上行传输的参考信号;当第三字段的取值为1,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号。When the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
在该实现方式中,示出了第三字段的长度以及第三字段的各种取值所指示的含义。从而实现对模式切换信息的指示。In this implementation, the length of the third field and the meanings indicated by various values of the third field are shown, thereby realizing the indication of the mode switching information.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入 控制控制元素(media access control control element,MAC CE)或第一下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。从而触发终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式。实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC重配终端设备的TCI模式。减少RRC重配时延。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receives a first media access from the network device Control control element (media access control control element, MAC CE) or first downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from common mode to separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from separate mode to common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt common mode. Thereby triggering the terminal device to switch to separate mode or common mode. Realize the terminal device to quickly switch to separate mode or common mode without the network device reconfiguring the TCI mode of the terminal device through RRC. Reduce RRC reconfiguration delay. This implementation method can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示所端设备采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。从而触发终端设备切换到分离模式。实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,无需网络设备通过RRC重配终端设备的TCI模式。减少RRC重配时延。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the terminal device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode. Thereby triggering the terminal device to switch to the separate mode. The terminal device is quickly switched to the separate mode without the network device reconfiguring the TCI mode of the terminal device through RRC. The RRC reconfiguration delay is reduced. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者第一MAC CE用于指示终端设备采用分离模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,每个代码点对应一个或两个TCI状态;一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt a separate mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each code point corresponding to one or two TCI states; at least one of the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one of the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state.
在该实现方式中,第一MAC CE还可以激活一个或多个TCI状态。一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。便于后续从激活的TCI状态指示相应的TCI状态,用于更新终端设备采用的上行波束。实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。In this implementation, the first MAC CE may also activate one or more TCI states. At least one of the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one of the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. This facilitates the subsequent indication of the corresponding TCI state from the activated TCI state, which is used to update the uplink beam adopted by the terminal device. The terminal device is switched to a separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个Pi字段的取值为1。在该实现方式中,通过该Pi字段的取值隐式指示第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态存在UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE has at least one Pi field with a value of 1. In this implementation, the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI state activated by the first MAC CE has a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a detached mode.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个下行(downlink,D)/上行(uplink,U)字段的取值为0。在该实现方式中,通过D/U字段指示第一MAC CE中激活的TCI状态包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE has at least one downlink (D)/uplink (U) field with a value of 0. In this implementation, the D/U field indicates that the TCI state activated in the first MAC CE includes the UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,该一个或多个代码点中每个代码点都只对应一个TCI状态,该TCI状态为共同TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到共同模式。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state. Thus, the terminal device is implicitly instructed to switch to the common mode.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有Pi字段的取值为0。在该实现方式中,通过该Pi字段的取值隐式指示第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态都为共同TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到共同模式。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0. In this implementation, the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI states activated by the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. Thus, the terminal device is implicitly instructed to switch to the common mode.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有D/U字段的取值为1。在该实现方式中,通过D/U字段指示第一MAC CE中激活的TCI状态都为共同TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到共同模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1. In this implementation, the D/U field indicates that the TCI states activated in the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to the common mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the first aspect or the second aspect.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI包括第四字段,第四字段用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。在该实现方式中,通过第四字段显示指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a fourth field, and the fourth field is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. In this implementation, the fourth field indicates that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点 对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态;终端设备根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,终端设备接收第二DCI,并通过第二DCI指示的第一代码点对应的UL TCI状态进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receives a second DCI from the network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among the one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or the first code point The corresponding TCI state includes a UL TCI state; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state in the two states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point. In this implementation, the terminal device receives the second DCI, and performs uplink transmission through the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point indicated by the second DCI. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to a separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,所述第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。从而指示终端设备采用该第一代码点对应的UL TCI状态进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state. Thus, the terminal device is instructed to use the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point for uplink transmission. Thus, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to a separation mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态进行上行传输,包括:终端设备通过UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案更为全面。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第一方面或第二方面。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state in the two states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point, including: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state. In this implementation, an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by a terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. Thereby, the solution is more comprehensive. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned first aspect or second aspect.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第二字段指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。对于第二字段指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识,示出了终端设备进行上行传输的实现方式。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, when the second field indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal; the method further includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal. For the second field indicating an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, an implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第一条件时,终端设备根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一条件包括以下一项或多项:在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;在终端设备接收来自网络设备的确定消息(acknowledgement,ACK)后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备使用该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式;或者,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,该TCI状态中的参考信号标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源上的参考信号标识。在该实现方式中,示出了当满足第一条件时,终端设备采用第二字段指示的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输的实现方式。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, when the first condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal; the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the terminal device receives the confirmation message (acknowledgement, ACK) from the network device, ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources; the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, the terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier on one of the reference signal resources among the one or more reference signal resources. In this implementation, when the first condition is met, the implementation method of the terminal device using the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal indicated by the second field for uplink transmission is shown. This enables the terminal device to update the uplink beam and switch to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号;终端设备根据第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,终端设备可以接收第四指示信息,并通过第四指示信息指示的第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the terminal device receives fourth indication information from the network device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal. In this implementation, the terminal device can receive the fourth indication information, and perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,所述上行传输,包括:终端设备根据第一UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含第一参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的部分带宽上行指示(bandwidth partuplink dedicated,BWP-UplinkDedicated)中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案更为全面。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the first UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the first reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the partial bandwidth uplink indication (bandwidth partuplink dedicated, BWP-UplinkDedicated) configured by the network device for the terminal device. In this implementation, an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by the terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the solution more comprehensive.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参 考信号。从而便于终端设备通过第四指示信息指示的第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method also includes: the network device sends a fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals. Thus, it is convenient for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. Thus, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备根据预设规则使用多个UL TCI状态的标识中的其中一个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识中的其中一个参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the second field indicates multiple UL TCI state identifiers or multiple reference signal identifiers; the method further includes: the terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,所述上行传输,包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案更为全面和丰富。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device. In this implementation, an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by the terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the solution more comprehensive and rich.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个;方法还包括:终端设备根据终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,对于终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个的情况,示出了终端设备进行上行传输的实现方式。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources; the method further includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal. In this implementation, for the case where the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources, an implementation method for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第二条件时,终端设备根据终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to an identifier of a UL TCI state associated with a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or an identifier of an associated reference signal;
第二条件包括以下至少一项:在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备使用终端设备当前使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式;或者,在终端设备接收来自网络设备的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到模式切换信息。在该实现方式中,示出了当满足第二条件时,终端设备根据终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输的实现方式。从而有利于终端设备在相应的条件选择合适的参考信号进行上行传输。The second condition includes at least one of the following: a first duration of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; the terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the UL TCI state identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode; or, a second duration of time has passed after the terminal device receives an ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information. In this implementation, it is shown that when the second condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal. This is conducive to the terminal device selecting a suitable reference signal for uplink transmission under the corresponding conditions.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识;终端设备根据该参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。实现终端设备进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal. The terminal device performs uplink transmission. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识,参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识用于终端设备进行上行传输。便于实现终端设备进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. It is convenient to implement the uplink transmission of the terminal device. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,所述上行传输,包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输,或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案的实现更为丰富。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation, the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal, or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameter and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device. An implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by a terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the implementation of the solution richer.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第三条件时,终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息;第三条件包括以下至少一项:终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制所需的功率回退量超过X分贝(dB),X大于或等于0; Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when a third condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device; the third condition includes at least one of the following: a power backoff amount required by a beam corresponding to a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device due to MPE restriction exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, the power backoff amount required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction;
终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上行传输;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者,The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
由此可知,上述示出了触发终端设备发送模式切换信息的一种可能的条件,从而有利于终端设备在相应的条件下合理的请求切换至分离模式,或者有利于终端设备切换至分离模式。从而提升终端设备的传输性能。It can be seen that the above shows a possible condition for triggering the terminal device to send mode switching information, which is conducive to the terminal device to reasonably request switching to the separation mode under corresponding conditions, or to switch the terminal device to the separation mode, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for the terminal device to report a measurement result.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置终端设备上报模式切换信息。从而实现终端设备在上报测量结果时上报该模式切换信息。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receives first configuration information from the network device, the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to report mode switching information, so that the terminal device reports the mode switching information when reporting the measurement result.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置终端设备上报模式切换信息。从而实现终端设备在上报测量结果时上报该模式切换信息。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to report mode switching information, so that the terminal device reports the mode switching information when reporting the measurement result.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一配置信息还用于配置终端设备上报一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first configuration information is further used to configure the terminal device to report measurement results of one or more reference signal resources.
基于第一方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态;终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中的共同TCI状态进行上下行传输。Based on the first aspect, in a possible implementation method, the method also includes: the terminal device receives a second DCI from the network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state; the terminal device performs uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态。Based on the second aspect, in a possible implementation method, the method also includes: the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
本申请第三方面提供一种信息发送方法,该方法由终端设备执行,终端设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块、或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到终端设备时,既可以指终端设备本身,也可以指终端设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第三方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该方法由终端设备执行为例进行描述。方法包括:The third aspect of the present application provides an information sending method, which is executed by a terminal device. The terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module, or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to a terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided by the present application, which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the third aspect and its possible implementation methods, the method is described as being executed by a terminal device. The method comprises:
终端设备确定模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式;然后,终端设备发送模式切换信息。The terminal device determines mode switching information, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode; then, the terminal device sends the mode switching information.
上述技术方案中,终端设备发送模式切换信息。模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。从而有利于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,减少RRC重配时延。降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。 In the above technical solution, the terminal device sends mode switching information. The mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. This is conducive to triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is the common mode or the separate mode. This is conducive to realizing the terminal device to quickly switch to the separate mode or the common mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. Reduce the switching delay to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
本申请第四方面提供一种信息接收方法,该方法由网络设备执行,网络设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到网络设备时,既可以指网络设备本身,也可以指网络设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第四方面及其可能的实现方式中,以该方法由网络设备执行为例进行描述。方法包括:The fourth aspect of the present application provides an information receiving method, which is executed by a network device. The network device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to a network device, it may refer to the network device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the network device that completes the method provided in the present application, which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the fourth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the method is described as being executed by a network device. The method comprises:
网络设备接收来自终端设备的模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。The network device receives mode switching information from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
上述技术方案中,网络设备接收来自终端设备的模式切换信息。从而有利于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式或共同模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,减少RRC重配时延。降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。In the above technical solution, the network device receives the mode switching information from the terminal device. This is conducive to triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode or the common mode. This is conducive to realizing the terminal device to quickly switch to the separate mode or the common mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the RRC reconfiguration delay. The switching delay is reduced to avoid affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识用于指示终端设备的上行传输的参考信息索引;或者,模式切换信息包括一个或多个参考信号的标识,一个或多个参考信号的标识用于指示终端设备的上行传输的参考信息索引。实现通过一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或一个或多个参考信号的标识隐式指示或间接指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information includes one or more UL TCI state identifiers, and the one or more UL TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the terminal device; or, the mode switching information includes one or more reference signal identifiers, and the one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the terminal device. The implementation implicitly indicates or indirectly indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode through the identifiers of one or more UL TCI states or one or more reference signals, or that the terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息承载于第一信令中。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the mode switching information is carried in the first signaling.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识,或包括一个或多个TCI状态标识,一个或多个参考信号资源标识或一个或多个TCI状态标识用于指示终端设备的下行传输的参考信息索引。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or includes one or more TCI state identifiers, and the one or more reference signal resource identifiers or one or more TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the downlink transmission of the terminal device.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识。在该实现方式中,每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个参考信号资源或一个TCI状态标识,或者,每个参考信号的标识关联一个参考信号资源或一个TCI状态标识。从而有利于后续终端设备结合下行方向所采用的参考信号资源选择合适的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers. In this implementation, each UL TCI state identifier is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier, or each reference signal identifier is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier. This is conducive to the subsequent terminal device selecting an appropriate UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier for uplink transmission in combination with the reference signal resource used in the downlink direction.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。从而触发终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式。实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC重配终端设备的TCI模式。减少RRC重配时延。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the terminal device receives a first MAC CE or a first DCI from the network device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode. Thereby triggering the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode. The terminal device is quickly switched to the separate mode or the common mode without the network device reconfiguring the TCI mode of the terminal device through the RRC. The RRC reconfiguration delay is reduced. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
基于第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC重配终端设备的TCI模式。减少RRC重配时延。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the terminal device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode. The terminal device is quickly switched to the separate mode or the common mode without the network device reconfiguring the TCI mode of the terminal device through RRC. The RRC reconfiguration delay is reduced. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect mentioned above.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者第一MAC CE用于指示终端设备采用分离模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,每个代码点对应一个或两个TCI状态;一个或 多个代码点中至少存在一个TCI代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个TCI代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。在该实现方式中,第一MAC CE还可以激活一个或多个TCI状态。一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。便于后续从激活的TCI状态指示相应的TCI状态,用于更新终端设备采用的上行波束。实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each code point corresponding to one or two TCI states; one or At least one TCI code point among multiple code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, at least one TCI code point among one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state that includes a UL TCI state. In this implementation, the first MAC CE may also activate one or more TCI states. At least one code point among one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, at least one code point among one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state that includes a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. This facilitates the subsequent indication of the corresponding TCI state from the activated TCI state, which is used to update the uplink beam adopted by the terminal device. The terminal device is switched to a separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个Pi字段的取值为1。在该实现方式中,通过该Pi字段的取值隐式指示第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态存在UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE has at least one Pi field with a value of 1. In this implementation, the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI state activated by the first MAC CE has a UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separation mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个D/U字段的取值为0。在该实现方式中,通过D/U字段指示第一MAC CE中激活的TCI状态包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, at least one D/U field in the first MAC CE has a value of 0. In this implementation, the TCI state activated in the first MAC CE is indicated by the D/U field, including the UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,该一个或多个代码点中每个代码点都只对应一个TCI状态,该TCI状态为共同TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到共同模式。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state. Thus, the terminal device is implicitly instructed to switch to the common mode.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有Pi字段的取值为0。在该实现方式中,通过该Pi字段的取值隐式指示第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态都为共同TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到共同模式。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0. In this implementation, the value of the Pi field implicitly indicates that the TCI states activated by the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to the common mode.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有D/U字段的取值为1。在该实现方式中,通过D/U字段指示第一MAC CE中激活的TCI状态都为共同TCI状态。从而隐式指示终端设备切换到共同模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1. In this implementation, the D/U field indicates that the TCI states activated in the first MAC CE are all common TCI states. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to the common mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI包括第一字段,第一字段用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。在该实现方式中,通过第一字段显示指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a first field, and the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. In this implementation, the first field indicates that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the third aspect or the fourth aspect.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态;终端设备根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,终端设备接收第二DCI,并通过第二DCI指示的第一代码点对应的UL TCI状态进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the terminal device receives a second DCI from the network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the two states corresponding to the first code point, or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the TCI states corresponding to the first code point. In this implementation, the terminal device receives the second DCI, and performs uplink transmission through the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point indicated by the second DCI. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
基于第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。从而指示终端设备采用该第一代码点对应的UL TCI状态进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state. Thereby instructing the terminal device to use the UL TCI state corresponding to the first code point for uplink transmission. Thereby enabling the terminal device to update the uplink beam and enable the terminal device to switch to the separation mode. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案更为全面。该实现方式可以作为独立的一方面,并不依赖于前述第三方面或第四方面。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state in the two states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point, including: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state. In this implementation, an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by a terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. Thereby, the solution is more comprehensive. This implementation can be used as an independent aspect and does not depend on the aforementioned third aspect or fourth aspect.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当模式切换信息包括一个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括一个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。 Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, when the mode switching information includes a UL TCI state identifier, or includes a reference signal identifier; the method also includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第一条件时,终端设备根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一条件包括以下一项或多项:在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;在终端设备接收来自网络设备的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到模式切换信息;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备使用该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式;或者,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号标识。在该实现方式中,对于模式切换信息包括一个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括一个参考信号的标识的情况,示出了终端设备进行上行传输的实现方式。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, when the first condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal; the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first duration of time has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; a second duration of time has passed after the terminal device receives an ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information; the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier corresponding to one of the reference signal resources in one or more reference signal resources. In this implementation, for the case where the mode switching information includes an identifier of a UL TCI state, or includes an identifier of a reference signal, an implementation method for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,所述上行传输,包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。在该实现方式中,提供了一种终端设备进行上行传输采用的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号的实现方式。从而使得方案更为全面和丰富。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the uplink transmission includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device. In this implementation, an implementation method for uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signals used by the terminal device for uplink transmission is provided. This makes the solution more comprehensive and rich.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号;终端设备根据第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而便于终端设备通过第四指示信息指示的第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the terminal device receives fourth indication information from the network device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal. This facilitates the terminal device to perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. This enables the terminal device to update the uplink beam and switch the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号。从而便于终端设备通过第四指示信息指示的第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the method further includes: the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals. This facilitates the terminal device to perform uplink transmission through the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal indicated by the fourth indication information. This enables the terminal device to update the uplink beam and switch the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多个参考信号的标识;方法还包括:终端设备根据预设规则使用多个UL TCI状态的标识中的其中一个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识中的其中一个参考信号的标识进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information includes multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or includes multiple reference signal identifiers; the method further includes: the terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个,或终端设备当前使用的TCI状态是一个或多个TCI状态标识对应的TCI状态中的一个;方法还包括:终端设备根据终端设备当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources, or the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers; the method also includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第二条件时,终端设备根据终端设备当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第二条件包括以下一项或多项:在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备使用终端设备当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式;或者,在终端设备接收来自网络设备的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到模式切换信息。在该实现方式中,对于终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个的情况,示出了终端设备进行上行传输的实现方式。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation, when the second condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal; the second condition includes one or more of the following: after the first time period has passed after the terminal device sends the mode switching information; the terminal device receives the fifth indication information from the network device, the fifth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device switches to the separation mode; or, after the second time period has passed after the terminal device receives the ACK from the network device, the ACK is used to indicate that the network device successfully receives the mode switching information. In this implementation, for the case where the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of one or more reference signal resources, the implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is shown. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一 个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识;终端设备根据参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。实现终端设备进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, and the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is one of the one or more reference signal resources. The terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal. The terminal device performs uplink transmission. Thus, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识,参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识用于终端设备进行上行传输。便于实现终端设备进行上行传输。从而实现终端设备更新上行波束,实现终端设备切换到分离模式。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. It is convenient to implement the uplink transmission of the terminal device. Thereby, the terminal device updates the uplink beam and switches the terminal device to the separation mode.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令为功率余量报告媒体接入控制控制元素(power headroom report media access control control element,PHR MAC CE),PHR MAC CE中每个用于指示参考信号资源的字段所在的字节中存在一个R字段,R字段用于指示参考信号资源是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。在该实现方式中,通过PHR MAC CE上报模式切换信息,提供一种承载载体,无需定义新的信令。进一步的,还可以通过PHR MAC CE中的R字段指示参考信号资源是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。从而实现对各个参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识的指示。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first signaling is a power headroom report media access control control element (PHR MAC CE), and there is an R field in each byte where the field for indicating the reference signal resource in the PHR MAC CE is located, and the R field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier. In this implementation, the PHR MAC CE reports the mode switching information to provide a bearer without defining new signaling. Furthermore, the R field in the PHR MAC CE can also indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier. Thereby, the indication of the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier associated with each reference signal resource is achieved.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当R字段的取值为1时,表示参考信号资源关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当R字段的取值为0时,表示参考信号资源不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令为PHR MAC CE,PHR MAC CE中的Pi字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号资源中的参考信号资源i是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。在该实现方式中,通过PHR MAC CE上报模式切换信息,提供一种承载载体,无需定义新的信令。进一步的,还可以通过PHR MAC CE中的Pi字段指示参考信号资源i是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。从而实现对各个参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识的指示。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first signaling is a PHR MAC CE, and the Pi field in the PHR MAC CE is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i in one or more reference signal resources is associated with the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal. In this implementation, a bearer is provided by reporting mode switching information through the PHR MAC CE, without defining new signaling. Furthermore, the Pi field in the PHR MAC CE can also be used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i is associated with the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal. Thereby, the indication of the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal associated with each reference signal resource is realized.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;或者,当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; or, when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括第二字段,第二字段用于指示第一信令是否包括UL TCI状态标识或参考信号标识。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling also includes a second field, and the second field is used to indicate whether the first signaling includes a UL TCI status identifier or a reference signal identifier.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括第三字段,第三字段用于触发终端设备由共同模式切换到分离模式。从而显示指示终端设备切换到分离模式。无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first signaling further includes a third field, and the third field is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. Thus, the terminal device is displayed to indicate that it is switched to the separate mode. There is no need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
基于第三方面或第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括一个或多个第四字段,一个或多个第四字段与一个或多个参考信号资源标识对应,或者,一个或多个第四字段与一个或多个TCI状态标识对应;每个第四字段用于指示第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识是否存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。Based on the third aspect or the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling also includes one or more fourth fields, and the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more TCI state identifiers; each fourth field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第一条件时,终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息;第一条件包括以下至少一项:终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制所需的功率回退量超过X分贝(dB),X大于或等于0;Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when a first condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device; the first condition includes at least one of the following: a power backoff amount required by a beam corresponding to a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device due to MPE restriction exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, the power backoff amount required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction;
终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上行传输;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者, The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
由此可知,上述示出了触发终端设备发送模式切换信息的一种可能的条件,从而有利于终端设备在相应的条件下合理的请求切换至分离模式,或者有利于终端设备切换至分离模式。从而提升终端设备的传输性能。It can be seen that the above shows a possible condition for triggering the terminal device to send mode switching information, which is conducive to the terminal device to reasonably request switching to the separation mode under corresponding conditions, or to switch the terminal device to the separation mode, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源,或者是PHR MAC CE中上报的参考信号资源,或者是配置的参考信号资源集合中的任意参考信号资源。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation method, the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for reporting measurement results of the terminal device, or reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE, or any reference signal resource in a configured reference signal resource set.
基于第三方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自网络设备的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态;根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中的共同TCI状态进行上下行传输。Based on the third aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a network device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state; and perform uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第四方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向终端设备发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the terminal device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
本申请第五方面提供一种第一通信装置,该第一通信装置可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到第一通信装置时,既可以是指第一通信装置本身,也可以指第一通信装置中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第五方面及其可能的实现方式中,以第一通信装置为例进行描述。包括:The fifth aspect of the present application provides a first communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the first communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the first communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the fifth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the first communication device is used as an example for description. Including:
处理模块,用于测量一个或多个参考信号资源;A processing module, configured to measure one or more reference signal resources;
收发模块,用于发送该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。A transceiver module is used to send the measurement results and mode switching information of the one or more reference signal resources, wherein the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
本申请第六方面提供一种第二通信装置,该第二通信装置可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到第一通信装置时,既可以是指第二通信装置本身,也可以指第二通信装置中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第六方面及其可能的实现方式中,以第二通信装置为例进行描述。包括:The sixth aspect of the present application provides a second communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the second communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the second communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the sixth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the second communication device is taken as an example for description. Including:
收发模块,用于接收来自第一通信装置的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。A transceiver module is used to receive measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from a first communication device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the first communication device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device; or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息通过第一字段指示。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the mode switching information is indicated by a first field.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第一字段的取值为第一值时,则模式切换信息指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息指示切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示第一通信装置采用分离模式;或者,当第一字段的取值为第二值时,则模式切换信息指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息指示不切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示第一通信装置采用共同模式。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the value of the first field is a first value, the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information indicates switching the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device adopts the separate mode; or, when the value of the first field is a second value, the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information indicates not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information indicates that the first communication device adopts the common mode.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第一字段的取值为0时,第一字段用于指示 第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于指示切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式;当第一字段的取值为1时,第一字段用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于指示不切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式;Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, when the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate The first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate switching of the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate not to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the common mode;
或者,or,
当第一字段的取值为0时,第一字段用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者用于指示不切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式;当第一字段的取值为1时,第一字段用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于指示切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式。When the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or is used to indicate that the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device is not switched, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the common mode; when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used for the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used to indicate to switch the TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode.
基于第一方面或第二方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一值为0,第二值为1;或者,第一值为1,第二值为0。Based on the first aspect or the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; or, the first value is 1, and the second value is 0.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式;模式切换信息通过第二字段指示,第二字段用于指示一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或第二字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号的标识。可选的,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识或一个或多个参考信号的标识用于指示第一通信装置选择进行上行传输的参考信息索引。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts the separate mode; the mode switching information is indicated by a second field, and the second field is used to indicate one or more UL TCI state identifiers, or the second field is used to indicate one or more reference signal identifiers. Optionally, one or more UL TCI state identifiers or one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index selected by the first communication device for uplink transmission.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个参考信号资源。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource in one or more reference signal resources.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个参考信号的标识是测量集合中的所述一个或多个参考信号的索引;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号在一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的局部标识。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the identifier of one or more reference signals is an index of the one or more reference signals in the measurement set; or, the identifier of one or more reference signals is a local identifier of one or more reference signals in the reference signals corresponding to one or more reference signal resources.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息通过一个或多个第三字段指示,一个或多个第三字段与一个或多个参考信号资源中的部分或全部参考信号资源对应,每个第三字段用于指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields, and the one or more third fields correspond to part or all of the reference signal resources in one or more reference signal resources, and each third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第三字段的取值为1,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号不能够作为上行传输的参考信号;当第三字段的取值为0,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号;或者,Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; or,
当第三字段的取值为0,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号不能够作为上行传输的参考信号;当第三字段的取值为1,指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号。When the value of the third field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission; when the value of the third field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive a first MAC CE or a first DCI from the second communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the first communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者第一MAC CE用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,每个代码点对应一个或两个TCI状态; 一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt the separate mode; the first MAC CE is further used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, and each code point corresponds to one or two TCI states; At least one of the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or at least one of the one or more code points corresponds to a TCI state including a UL TCI state.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个Pi字段的取值为1。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, there is at least one Pi field in the first MAC CE whose value is 1.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个D/U字段的取值为0。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, there is at least one D/U field in the first MAC CE whose value is 0.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,该一个或多个代码点中每个代码点都只对应一个TCI状态,该TCI状态为共同TCI状态。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, the one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有Pi字段的取值为0。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有D/U字段的取值为1。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI包括第四字段,第四字段用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a fourth field, and the fourth field is used to indicate that the first communication device switches from a common mode to a separate mode.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于接收来自第二通信装置的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态;处理模块还用于:根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the two states corresponding to the first code point, or, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,所述第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:通过UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当第二字段指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识;处理模块具体用于:根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the second field indicates an UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier; the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:当满足第一条件时,根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一条件包括以下一项或多项:在第一通信装置发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;在第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示第二通信装置成功接收到一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第一通信装置使用该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一通信装置切换到分离模式;或者,第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,该TCI状态中的参考信号标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源上的参考信号标识。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: when a first condition is met, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources; the first communication device receives first indication information from the second communication device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device uses the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier for uplink transmission; the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device switches to a separate mode; or, the first communication device receives third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier on one of the one or more reference signal resources.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识;收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号;处理模块还用于:根据第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the transceiver module is also used to: receive fourth indication information from the second communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:根据第一UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,通过包含第一参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,采用第二通信装置为第一通信装置配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the first UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission by using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the first reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission by using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识;收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or the identifiers of multiple reference signals; the transceiver module is also used to: send fourth indication information to the first communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第二字段指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的 标识;处理模块还用于:根据预设规则使用多个UL TCI状态的标识中的其中一个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识中的其中一个参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the second field indicates the identifiers of multiple UL TCI states or multiple reference signals. The processing module is also used for: using one of the UL TCI state identifiers or one of the reference signal identifiers in the multiple UL TCI state identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,采用第二通信装置为第一通信装置配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个;处理模块还用于:根据第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device is one of one or more reference signal resources; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当满足第二条件时,根据第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second condition is met, uplink transmission is performed according to an identifier of a UL TCI state associated with a reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device or an identifier of an associated reference signal;
第二条件包括以下至少一项:在第一通信装置发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示第一通信装置使用第一通信装置当前使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一通信装置切换到分离模式;或者,在第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示第二通信装置成功接收到模式切换信息。The second condition includes at least one of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information; the first communication device receives fifth indication information from the second communication device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to use the UL TCI state identifier or the associated reference signal identifier associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for uplink transmission; the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to switch to the separation mode; or, a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识;处理模块还用于:根据该参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识,参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识用于第一通信装置进行上行传输。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send third indication information to the first communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for uplink transmission by the first communication device.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,采用第二通信装置为第一通信装置配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:当满足第三条件时,向第二通信装置发送模式切换信息;第三条件包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制所需的功率回退量超过X分贝(dB),X大于或等于0;Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is further used to: when a third condition is met, send mode switching information to the second communication device; the third condition includes at least one of the following: the power backoff amount required by the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission is limited by MPE exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, there is at least one reference signal resource whose corresponding beam has a power backoff amount exceeding XdB due to MPE restriction;
第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上行传输;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restriction;
第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者,The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission; or,
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号资源是第一通信装置上报测量结果的参考信号资源。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for the first communication device to report measurement results.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置第一通信装置上报模式切换信息。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is further used to: receive first configuration information from the second communication device, where the first configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to report mode switching information.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第一配置信息,第 一配置信息用于配置第一通信装置上报模式切换信息。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is further used to: send the first configuration information to the first communication device, The configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to report mode switching information.
基于第五方面或第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一配置信息还用于配置第一通信装置上报一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果。Based on the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first configuration information is also used to configure the first communication device to report measurement results of one or more reference signal resources.
基于第五方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态;根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中的共同TCI状态进行上下行传输。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state; and perform uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第六方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
本申请第七方面提供一种第一通信装置,该第一通信装置可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到第一通信装置时,既可以是指第一通信装置本身,也可以指第一通信装置中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第七方面及其可能的实现方式中,以第一通信装置为例进行描述。包括:The seventh aspect of the present application provides a first communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the first communication device, it may refer to the first communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the first communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the seventh aspect and its possible implementation methods, the first communication device is taken as an example for description. Including:
处理模块,用于确定模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式;a processing module, configured to determine mode switching information, wherein the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device is to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device is to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is a common mode or a separate mode;
收发模块,用于发送模式切换信息。The transceiver module is used to send mode switching information.
本申请第八方面提供一种第二通信装置,该第二通信装置可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到第二通信装置时,既可以是指第二通信装置本身,也可以指第二通信装置中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。在第八方面及其可能的实现方式中,以第二通信装置为例进行描述。包括:The eighth aspect of the present application provides a second communication device, which may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, which is not specifically limited in the present application. It should be noted that in the present application, when referring to the second communication device, it may refer to the second communication device itself, or to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the second communication device that completes the method provided in the present application, etc., which is not specifically limited in the present application. In the eighth aspect and its possible implementation methods, the second communication device is described as an example. Including:
收发模块,用于接收来自第一通信装置的模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于第一通信装置请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示第一通信装置采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。A transceiver module is used to receive mode switching information from a first communication device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the first communication device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the first communication device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate a TCI mode adopted by the first communication device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识用于指示第一通信装置的上行传输的参考信息索引;或者,模式切换信息包括一个或多个参考信号的标识,一个或多个参考信号的标识用于指示第一通信装置的上行传输的参考信息索引。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the mode switching information includes one or more UL TCI state identifiers, and the one or more UL TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the first communication device; or, the mode switching information includes one or more reference signal identifiers, and the one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the first communication device.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息承载于第一信令中。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the mode switching information is carried in the first signaling.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识,或包括一个或多个TCI状态标识,一个或多个参考信号资源标识或一个或多个TCI状态标识用于指示第一通信装置的下行传输的参考信息索引。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or includes one or more TCI state identifiers, and the one or more reference signal resource identifiers or one or more TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the downlink transmission of the first communication device.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识;或者,一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, each UL TCI state identifier in one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers; or, each reference signal identifier in one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier in one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier in one or more TCI state identifiers.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI 用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is further used to: receive a first MAC CE or a first DCI from the second communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI being used to instruct the first communication device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. Used to indicate that the first communication device adopts a separate mode, or the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to indicate that the first communication device adopts a common mode.
基于第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第一MAC CE或第一DCI,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式,或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式。Based on the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the first communication device, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode, or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者第一MAC CE用于指示第一通信装置采用分离模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,每个代码点对应一个或两个TCI状态;一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个TCI代码点对应两个TCI状态;和/或,一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个TCI代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the first MAC CE is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a separate mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, one or more TCI states corresponding to one or more code points, each code point corresponding to one or two TCI states; at least one TCI code point among the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI states; and/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one TCI code point among the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个Pi字段的取值为1。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, there is at least one Pi field in the first MAC CE whose value is 1.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE至少存在一个D/U字段的取值为0。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, there is at least one D/U field in the first MAC CE whose value is 0.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示第一通信装置采用共同模式;第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点,该一个或多个代码点中每个代码点都只对应一个TCI状态,该TCI状态为共同TCI状态。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the first communication device to adopt a common mode; the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, and the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points, each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有Pi字段的取值为0。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE中所有D/U字段的取值为1。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI包括第一字段,第一字段用于指示第一通信装置从共同模式切换到分离模式。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a first field, and the first field is used to indicate that the first communication device switches from a common mode to a separate mode.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态;处理模块还用于:根据第一代码点对应的两个状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state among the two states corresponding to the first code point, or, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应两个TCI状态;或者,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。Based on the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to two TCI states; or, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a UL TCI state.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当模式切换信息包括一个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括一个参考信号的标识;处理模块具体用于:根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the mode switching information includes a UL TCI state identifier, or includes a reference signal identifier; the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:当满足第一条件时,根据UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一条件包括以下一项或多项:在第一通信装置发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;在第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示第二通信装置成功接收到模式切换信息;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第一通信装置使用该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一通信装置切换到分离模式;或者,第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号标识。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: when a first condition is met, perform uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; the first condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information; a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information; the first communication device receives first indication information from the second communication device, the first indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device uses the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier for uplink transmission; the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to indicate that the first communication device switches to a separate mode; or, the first communication device receives third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,通过包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,采用第二通信装置为第一通信装置配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, perform uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal; or, perform uplink transmission using the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the second communication device for the first communication device.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多 个参考信号的标识;收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号;处理模块还用于:根据第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or includes multiple The transceiver module is also used to: receive fourth indication information from the second communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier.
基于第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多个参考信号的标识;收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识,第一UL TCI状态属于多个UL TCI状态,第一参考信号属于多个参考信号。Based on the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the mode switching information includes identifiers of multiple UL TCI states, or identifiers of multiple reference signals; the transceiver module is also used to: send fourth indication information to the first communication device, the fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal, the first UL TCI state belongs to multiple UL TCI states, and the first reference signal belongs to multiple reference signals.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括多个UL TCI状态的标识,或者包括多个参考信号的标识;处理模块还用于:根据预设规则使用多个UL TCI状态的标识中的其中一个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识中的其中一个参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the mode switching information includes multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or includes multiple reference signal identifiers; the processing module is also used to: use one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to preset rules.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源是一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个,或第一通信装置当前使用的TCI状态是一个或多个TCI状态标识对应的TCI状态中的一个;处理模块还用于:根据第一通信装置当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the first communication device is one of one or more reference signal resources, or the TCI state currently used by the first communication device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块具体用于:当满足第二条件时,根据第一通信装置当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第二条件包括以下一项或多项:在第一通信装置发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示第一通信装置使用第一通信装置当前使用的参考信号资源或TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一通信装置切换到分离模式;或者,在第一通信装置接收来自第二通信装置的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示第二通信装置成功接收到模式切换信息。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the processing module is specifically used to: when the second condition is met, uplink transmission is performed according to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the UL TCI state identifier associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal; the second condition includes one or more of the following: a first period of time has passed after the first communication device sends the mode switching information; the first communication device receives fifth indication information from the second communication device, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to use the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device or the UL TCI state identifier associated with the TCI state or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; the first communication device receives second indication information from the second communication device, the second indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to switch to the separation mode; or, after a second period of time has passed after the first communication device receives an ACK from the second communication device, the ACK is used to indicate that the second communication device has successfully received the mode switching information.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识;处理模块还用于:根据参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive third indication information from the second communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is the identifier of the reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources; the processing module is also used to: perform uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
基于第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识,参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识用于第一通信装置进行上行传输。Based on the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send third indication information to the first communication device, the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, the identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of one or more reference signal resources, and the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal is used for uplink transmission by the first communication device.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令为PHR MAC CE,PHR MAC CE中每个用于指示参考信号资源的字段所在的字节中存在一个R字段,R字段用于指示参考信号资源是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling is PHR MAC CE, and there is an R field in each byte where the field for indicating the reference signal resource in the PHR MAC CE is located, and the R field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI status identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当R字段的取值为1时,表示参考信号资源关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当R字段的取值为0时,表示参考信号资源不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令为PHR MAC CE,PHR MAC CE中的Pi字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号资源中的参考信号资源i是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling is PHR MAC CE, and the Pi field in PHR MAC CE is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i in one or more reference signal resources is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;或者,当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; or, when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括第二字段,第二字段用于指示 第一信令是否包括UL TCI状态标识或参考信号标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first signaling further includes a second field, and the second field is used to indicate Whether the first signaling includes a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括第三字段,第三字段用于触发第一通信装置由共同模式切换到分离模式。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first signaling also includes a third field, and the third field is used to trigger the first communication device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
基于第七方面或第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令还包括一个或多个第四字段,一个或多个第四字段与一个或多个参考信号资源标识对应,或者,一个或多个第四字段与一个或多个TCI状态标识对应;每个第四字段用于指示第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识是否存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。Based on the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the first signaling also includes one or more fourth fields, and the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or the one or more fourth fields correspond to one or more TCI state identifiers; each fourth field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:当满足第一条件时,向第二通信装置发送模式切换信息;第一条件包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制所需的功率回退量超过X分贝(dB),X大于或等于0;Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is further used to: when a first condition is met, send mode switching information to the second communication device; the first condition includes at least one of the following: the power backoff amount required by the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission is limited by MPE exceeds X decibels (dB), and X is greater than or equal to 0;
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, there is at least one reference signal resource whose corresponding beam has a power backoff amount exceeding XdB due to MPE restriction;
第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上行传输;Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restriction;
第一通信装置当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者,The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the first communication device for transmission can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission; or,
第一通信装置上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the first communication device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号资源是第一通信装置上报测量结果的参考信号资源,或者是PHR MAC CE中上报的参考信号资源,或者是配置的参考信号资源集合中的任意参考信号资源。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for reporting measurement results by the first communication device, or reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE, or any reference signal resource in a configured reference signal resource set.
基于第七方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:接收来自第二通信装置的第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点,第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应TCI状态包括共同TCI状态;根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中的共同TCI状态进行上下行传输。Based on the seventh aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: receive a second DCI from a second communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points, the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the first code point corresponds to a TCI state including a common TCI state; perform uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
基于第八方面,一种可能的实现方式中,收发模块还用于:向第一通信装置发送第二DCI,第二DCI用于指示一个或多个代码点中的第一代码点;第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态,或第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括共同TCI状态。Based on the eighth aspect, in a possible implementation method, the transceiver module is also used to: send a second DCI to the first communication device, the second DCI is used to indicate a first code point among one or more code points; the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state, or the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state.
本申请第九方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中的任意一种实现方式。In a ninth aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, the communication device comprising: a processor and a memory. The memory stores a computer program or a computer instruction, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program or the computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器。该处理器用于调用存储起中的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中的任意一种实现方式。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising a processor. The processor is used to call a computer program or computer instruction stored therein, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十一方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,处理器用于执行如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面的任意一种实现方式。In an eleventh aspect of the present application, a communication device is provided, which includes a processor, and the processor is used to execute any one of the implementation methods of any one of the first to fourth aspects.
本申请第十二方面提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中的任一种的实现方式。A twelfth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, characterized in that when it is run on a computer, it enables the computer to execute any implementation method of any one of the first to fourth aspects.
本申请第十三方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中的任一种实现方式。A thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer instructions, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
本申请第十四方面提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述如第一方面至第四方面中任一方面中的任一种实现方式。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides a chip device, comprising a processor, for calling a computer program or computer instruction in the memory so that the processor executes any one of the implementation methods in any one of the first to fourth aspects described above.
可选的,该处理器通过接口与该存储器耦合。Optionally, the processor is coupled to the memory via an interface.
本申请第十五方面提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括终端设备和网络设备;终端设备用于执行如第一方面中所示的任一项实现方式,网络设备用于执行如第二方面所示的任一项实现方式;或者,终端 设备用于执行如第三方面中所示的任一项实现方式,网络设备用于执行如第四方面所示的任一项实现方式。In a fifteenth aspect, the present application provides a communication system, which includes a terminal device and a network device; the terminal device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the first aspect, and the network device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the second aspect; or, the terminal The device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the third aspect, and the network device is used to execute any one of the implementations shown in the fourth aspect.
经由上述技术方案可知,测量一个或多个参考信号资源。然后,发送该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。该模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,该模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。由此可知,终端设备可以在上报参考信号资源的测量结果时上报模式切换信息,从而触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式或共同模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。It can be known from the above technical solution that one or more reference signal resources are measured. Then, the measurement results and mode switching information of the one or more reference signal resources are sent. The mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is a common mode or a separate mode. It can be seen from this that the terminal device can report the mode switching information when reporting the measurement results of the reference signal resources, thereby triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or triggering the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode or the common mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, reducing the switching delay, and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
图1为本申请实施例通信系统的一个示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例通信系统的另一个示意图;FIG2 is another schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3A为本申请实施例MAC CE的一个格式示意图;FIG3A is a format diagram of a MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3B为本申请实施例PHR MAC CE的一个格式示意图;FIG3B is a format diagram of PHR MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例测量结果发送方法、测量结果接收方法的一个实施例示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a method for sending measurement results and a method for receiving measurement results according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的另一个实施例示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例PHR MAC CE的另一个格式示意图;FIG6 is another format diagram of PHR MAC CE according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例PHR MAC CE的再一个格式示意图;FIG7 is another format diagram of the PHR MAC CE according to the embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的再一个实施例示意图;FIG8 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的再一个实施例示意图;FIG9 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的再一个实施例示意图;FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method according to the embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例通信装置的一个结构示意图;FIG11 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;FIG12 is another schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例通信装置的再一个结构示意图;FIG13 is another schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例终端设备的一个结构示意图;FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例基站的一个结构示意图。FIG15 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a base station according to an embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例提供了一种信息发送方法、信息接收方法以及相关装置,用于发送一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,从而触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式。无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。The embodiments of the present application provide an information sending method, an information receiving method and a related device, which are used to send measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, thereby triggering a terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or triggering a terminal device to switch from a separate mode to a common mode. It is not necessary for a network device to configure a terminal device to switch to a separate mode or a common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统。例如,5G系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、5G网络之后的移动通信系统(例如,6G移动通信系统)、车联网(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信系统等。The technical solution of the present application can be applied to various communication systems. For example, 5G system, new radio (NR) system, long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD) system, universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), mobile communication system after 5G network (for example, 6G mobile communication system), vehicle to everything (V2X) communication system, etc.
本申请适用的通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备,网络设备与终端设备可以采用波束进行通信。The communication system to which the present application is applicable includes a network device and a terminal device, and the network device and the terminal device can communicate using beams.
下面对本申请的终端设备和网络设备进行介绍。The terminal device and network device of this application are introduced below.
终端设备可以是能够接收网络设备调度信息和指示信息的无线终端设备。终端设备可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,或具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。 The terminal device may be a wireless terminal device capable of receiving network device scheduling information and indication information. The terminal device may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, or a handheld device with wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
终端设备,又称之为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、客户前置设备(customer premise equipment,CPE)等。终端设备是包括无线通信功能(向用户提供语音/数据连通性)的设备。例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或车载设备等。目前,一些终端设备的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、车联网中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等。例如,无人驾驶中的无线终端可以为无人机、直升机、或飞机等。例如,车联网中的无线终端可以为车载设备、整车设备、车载模块、车辆、或轮船等。工业控制中的无线终端可以为摄像头、机器人、或机械臂等。智慧家庭中的无线终端可以为电视、空调、扫地机、音箱、或机顶盒等。Terminal equipment, also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), customer premise equipment (CPE), etc. Terminal equipment is equipment that includes wireless communication functions (providing voice/data connectivity to users). For example, handheld devices with wireless connection functions, or vehicle-mounted devices, etc. At present, some examples of terminal devices are: mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, augmented reality (AR) devices, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in Internet of Vehicles, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, or wireless terminals in smart homes. For example, the wireless terminal in self-driving can be a drone, a helicopter, or an airplane. For example, the wireless terminal in Internet of Vehicles can be a vehicle-mounted device, a vehicle-mounted device, a vehicle-mounted module, a vehicle, or a ship. The wireless terminal in industrial control can be a camera, a robot, or a robotic arm. The wireless terminals in a smart home can be TVs, air conditioners, vacuum cleaners, speakers, or set-top boxes.
需要说明的是,终端设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是上述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到终端设备时,既可以指终端设备本身,也可以指终端设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the terminal device may be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the device or apparatus shown above, and this application does not limit it. It should be noted that in this application, when referring to the terminal device, it may refer to the terminal device itself, or to the chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the terminal device that completes the method provided in this application, and this application does not limit it.
网络设备可以无线网络中的设备。例如,网络设备可以是部署在无线接入网中为终端设备提供无线通信功能的设备。例如,网络设备可以为将终端设备接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点,又可以称为接入网设备、RAN实体、接入节点、网络节点、或通信装置等。A network device may be a device in a wireless network. For example, a network device may be a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions for a terminal device. For example, a network device may be a radio access network (RAN) node that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, and may also be referred to as an access network device, a RAN entity, an access node, a network node, or a communication device.
具体的,网络设备可以是为第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)相关的蜂窝系统的接入网设备。例如,4G通信系统,或5G通信系统。网络设备还可以是开放式接入网(open RAN,O-RAN或ORAN)或云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)中的接入网设备。或者,网络设备还可以是以上两种或两种以上的通信系统融合得到的通信系统中的接入网设备。Specifically, the network device may be an access network device for a cellular system related to the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP). For example, a 4G communication system, or a 5G communication system. The network device may also be an access network device in an open access network (open RAN, O-RAN or ORAN) or a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN). Alternatively, the network device may also be an access network device in a communication system obtained by integrating two or more of the above communication systems.
网络设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、宏基站、微基站、无线中继节点、施主节点、CRAN场景下的无线控制器、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者传输接收点(transmission and receiving point,TRP)等,还可以为5G移动通信系统中的网络设备。例如,NR系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB),TRP,TP;或者,5G移动通信系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板;或者,网络设备还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点。例如,集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)、分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)、集中式单元-控制面(centralized unit control plane,CU-CP)、集中式单元-用户面(centralized unit user plane,CU-UP)、或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一网元中,例如,BBU。RU可以包括在射频设备或射频单元中。例如,在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。或者,网络设备还可以是服务器、可穿戴设备、车辆或车载设备等。例如,V2X技术中的接入网设备可以是路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。The network equipment includes, but is not limited to, evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), access point (AP) in wireless fidelity (WIFI) system, macro base station, micro base station, wireless relay node, donor node, wireless controller in CRAN scenario, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and receiving point (TRP), etc. It can also be network equipment in 5G mobile communication system. For example, a next generation NodeB (gNB), TRP, TP in an NR system; or one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of a base station in a 5G mobile communication system; or, the network device may also be a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point. For example, a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a centralized unit-control plane (CU-CP), a centralized unit-user plane (CU-UP), or a radio unit (RU). The CU and DU may be separately configured or may be included in the same network element, such as a BBU. The RU may be included in a radio frequency device or a radio frequency unit. For example, in a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH). Alternatively, the network device may also be a server, a wearable device, a vehicle, or an onboard device. For example, the access network device in V2X technology can be a road side unit (RSU).
需要说明的是,在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在ORAN系统中,CU也可以称为开放式集中式单元(open centralized unit,O-CU)或者开放式CU,DU也可以称为开放式分布式单元(open distributed unit,O-DU),CU-CP也可以称为开放式-集中式单元-控制面(open centralized unit control plane,O-CU-CP),CU-UP也可以称为开放式-集中式单元-用户面(open centralized unit user plane,O-CU-UP),RU也可以称为开放式无线单元(open radio unit,O-RU),具体本申请不做限定。本申请中的CU、CU-CP、CU-UP、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来一起实现。 It should be noted that in different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, in the ORAN system, CU may also be called an open centralized unit (open centralized unit, O-CU) or an open CU, DU may also be called an open distributed unit (open distributed unit, O-DU), CU-CP may also be called an open-centralized unit-control plane (open centralized unit control plane, O-CU-CP), CU-UP may also be called an open-centralized unit-user plane (open centralized unit user plane, O-CU-UP), and RU may also be called an open radio unit (open radio unit, O-RU), which is not limited in this application. Any of the CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU and RU in this application may be implemented together through a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
可选的,对于ORAN系统中的网元,各个网元可以实现如下述表1所示的协议层功能。Optionally, for network elements in the ORAN system, each network element may implement the protocol layer functions shown in Table 1 below.
表1
Table 1
需要说明的是,在ORAN系统中,本申请中的网络设备可以是上述表1中的一种网元或多种网元。It should be noted that, in the ORAN system, the network device in the present application may be one or more network elements in Table 1 above.
下面介绍接入网设备的CU和DU的架构。接入网设备包括至少一个CU和至少一个DU。可选的,接入网设备还包括至少一个RU。The following describes the architecture of the CU and DU of the access network device. The access network device includes at least one CU and at least one DU. Optionally, the access network device also includes at least one RU.
下面以接入网设备包括一个CU和一个DU为例进行介绍。CU具有核心网的部分功能,CU可以包括CU-CP和CU-UP。CU和DU可以根据其实现的无线网络的协议层功能进行配置。例如,CU被配置为用以实现分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层及以上协议层(例如,RRC层和/或SDAP层的功能。DU被配置为用以实现PDCP层以下协议层(例如,RLC层、MAC层、和/或物理(physical,PHY)层)的功能。又例如,CU被配置为用以实现PDCP层以上协议层(如RRC层和/或SDAP层)的功能,DU被配置为用以实现PDCP层及以下协议层(例如RLC层、MAC层、和/或PHY层等)的功能。The following is an introduction using an access network device including a CU and a DU as an example. The CU has some functions of the core network, and the CU may include a CU-CP and a CU-UP. The CU and the DU may be configured according to the protocol layer functions of the wireless network they implement. For example, the CU is configured to implement the functions of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the protocol layers above (for example, the RRC layer and/or the SDAP layer). The DU is configured to implement the functions of the protocol layers below the PDCP layer (for example, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and/or the physical (PHY) layer). For another example, the CU is configured to implement the functions of the protocol layers above the PDCP layer (such as the RRC layer and/or the SDAP layer), and the DU is configured to implement the functions of the PDCP layer and the protocol layers below (for example, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and/or the PHY layer, etc.).
当CU包括CU-CP和CU-UP时,CU-CP用于实现CU的控制面功能,CU-UP用于实现CU的用户面功能。例如CU被配置为用以实现PDCP层、RRC层和SDAP层的功能时,CU-CP用于实现RRC层功能和PDCP层的控制面功能,CU-UP用于实现SDAP层功能和PDCP层的用户面功能。When the CU includes a CU-CP and a CU-UP, the CU-CP is used to implement the control plane function of the CU, and the CU-UP is used to implement the user plane function of the CU. For example, when the CU is configured to implement the functions of the PDCP layer, the RRC layer, and the SDAP layer, the CU-CP is used to implement the control plane function of the RRC layer and the PDCP layer, and the CU-UP is used to implement the user plane function of the SDAP layer and the PDCP layer.
CU-CP可以与核心网中用于实现控制面功能的网元交互。核心网中用于实现控制面功能的网元可以是接入和移动性功能网元,例如5G系统中的接入和移动功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)。所述接入和移动性功能网元用于负责移动网络中的移动性管理,如终端设备的位置更新、终端设备的注册网络、终端设备的切换等。CU-CP can interact with network elements in the core network for implementing control plane functions. The network elements in the core network for implementing control plane functions can be access and mobility function network elements, such as access and mobility management function (AMF) in 5G systems. The access and mobility function network elements are responsible for mobility management in mobile networks, such as location update of terminal devices, registration network of terminal devices, switching of terminal devices, etc.
CU-UP可以与核心网中用于实现用户面功能的网元交互。核心网中用于实现用户面功能的网元,例如,5G系统中的用户功能(User Plane Function,UPF),用于负责终端设备中数据的转发和接收。CU-UP can interact with network elements in the core network that implement user plane functions. Network elements in the core network that implement user plane functions, such as the User Plane Function (UPF) in the 5G system, are responsible for forwarding and receiving data in terminal devices.
以上CU,DU的配置仅仅是一种举例,也可以根据需要配置CU,DU具有的功能。例如,可以将CU或者DU配置为具有更多协议层的功能,或者将CU或DU配置为具有协议层的部分处理功能。例如,将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。再例如,可以按照业务类型或者其他系统需求对CU或者DU的功能进行划分。例如,按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足较小时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。The above configuration of CU and DU is only an example, and the functions of CU and DU can also be configured as needed. For example, the CU or DU can be configured to have the functions of more protocol layers, or the CU or DU can be configured to have partial processing functions of the protocol layer. For example, some functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in the DU. For another example, the functions of the CU or DU can be divided according to the service type or other system requirements. For example, by delay, the functions whose processing time needs to meet the smaller delay requirement are set in the DU, and the functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in the CU.
DU和RU可以合作共同实现PHY层的功能。一个DU可以和一个或多个RU相连。DU和RU所具有的功能可以根据设计被配置为多种方式。例如,DU被配置用于实现基带功能,RU被配置用于实现中射频功能。再例如,DU被配置为用以实现PHY层中的高层功能,RU被配置为实现PHY层中的低层功能或者 实现该低层功能和射频功能。物理层中的高层功能可以包括物理层的一部分功能,该部分功能更加靠近MAC层,物理层中的低层功能可以包括物理层的另一部分功能,该部分功能更加靠近中射频侧。DU and RU can work together to implement the functions of the PHY layer. A DU can be connected to one or more RUs. The functions of DU and RU can be configured in various ways according to the design. For example, DU is configured to implement baseband functions, and RU is configured to implement mid-frequency functions. For another example, DU is configured to implement high-level functions in the PHY layer, and RU is configured to implement low-level functions in the PHY layer or The high-level functions in the physical layer may include a part of the functions of the physical layer, which is closer to the MAC layer, and the low-level functions in the physical layer may include another part of the functions of the physical layer, which is closer to the mid-radio side.
网络设备还可以是核心网设备。例如,网络设备为控制面的功能实体包括接入移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、或会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)。AMF负责用户接入管理,安全认证、移动性管理等。数据面的功能实体包括用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)。UPF负责管理用户面数据的传输、流量统计等功能。The network device can also be a core network device. For example, the functional entity of the network device for the control plane includes the access and mobility management function (AMF) or the session management function (SMF). AMF is responsible for user access management, security authentication, mobility management, etc. The functional entity of the data plane includes the user plane function (UPF). UPF is responsible for managing the transmission of user plane data, traffic statistics and other functions.
需要说明的是,网络设备可以是带有芯片的设备或装置,或者是集成有电路的设备或装置,或者是前述示出的设备或装置中的芯片、芯片系统、模块或控制单元,具体本申请不做限定。需要说明的是,本申请中,提到网络设备时,既可以指网络设备本身,也可以指网络设备中完成本申请提供的方法的芯片、功能模块或集成电路等,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the network device can be a device or apparatus with a chip, or a device or apparatus with an integrated circuit, or a chip, chip system, module or control unit in the aforementioned device or apparatus, and this application does not limit it. It should be noted that in this application, when referring to a network device, it can refer to the network device itself, or it can refer to a chip, functional module or integrated circuit in the network device that completes the method provided in this application, and this application does not limit it.
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,下面结合图1和图2示出了本申请实施例提供的方法适用的两种可能的通信系统。To facilitate understanding of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, two possible communication systems to which the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable are shown below in combination with FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 .
图1为本申请实施例通信系统的一个示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统包括至少一个网络设备。例如,如图1所示的网络设备111,该通信系统还包括至少一个终端设备。例如,如图1所示的终端设备121和终端设备122。网络设备111可以与终端设备121和终端设备122之间可以采用波束进行传输。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG1 , the communication system includes at least one network device. For example, the network device 111 shown in FIG1 , and the communication system further includes at least one terminal device. For example, the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 shown in FIG1 . The network device 111 can transmit with the terminal device 121 and the terminal device 122 using beams.
图2为本申请实施例通信系统的另一个示意图。如图2所示,该通信系统可以包括至少两个网络设备。例如,如图2所示的网络设备211、网络设备212和网络设备213。该通信系统还包括至少一个终端设备。例如,如图2所示的终端设备221。终端设备221可以由多个网络设备提供通信服务。例如,如图2所示,网络设备211可以采用波束1与终端设备221进行传输,网络设备212可以采用波束2与终端设备221进行传输。网络设备213可以采用波束3与终端设备221进行传输。也就是说一个终端设备可以由多个网络设备同时提供通信服务。FIG2 is another schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG2 , the communication system may include at least two network devices. For example, network device 211, network device 212, and network device 213 as shown in FIG2 . The communication system also includes at least one terminal device. For example, terminal device 221 as shown in FIG2 . Terminal device 221 may be provided with communication services by multiple network devices. For example, as shown in FIG2 , network device 211 may use beam 1 to transmit with terminal device 221, and network device 212 may use beam 2 to transmit with terminal device 221. Network device 213 may use beam 3 to transmit with terminal device 221. That is to say, one terminal device may be provided with communication services by multiple network devices at the same time.
下面介绍本申请涉及的一些技术术语。Some technical terms involved in this application are introduced below.
波束(beam):波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束,形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术、模拟波束成形技术和混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。Beam: A beam is a communication resource. A beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams. The technology used to form the beam can be beamforming technology or other technical means. Beamforming technology can specifically include digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
波束在NR协议中可以称为空域滤波器(spatial domain filter),空间滤波器(spatial filter),空域参数(spatial domain parameter),空间参数(spatial parameter),空域设置(spatial domain setting),空间设置(spatial setting),准共址(quasi-colocation,QCL)信息,QCL假设,或QCL指示等。波束可以通过传输配置编号状态(transmission configuration indicator state,TCI-state)参数来指示,或者通过空间关系(spatial relation)参数来指示。因此,本申请中,波束可以替换为空域滤波器,空间滤波器,空域参数,空间参数,空域设置,空间设置,准同位(quasi-co-location,QCL)信息,QCL假设,QCL指示,TCI-state)(包括UL TCI状态,下行TCI状态(downlink TCI state,DL TCI state)),或空间关系等。上述术语之间也相互等效。波束也可以替换为其他表示波束的术语,本申请在此不作限定。A beam may be referred to in the NR protocol as a spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial domain parameter, spatial parameter, spatial domain setting, spatial setting, quasi-colocation (QCL) information, QCL assumption, or QCL indication. A beam may be indicated by a transmission configuration indicator state (TCI-state) parameter or by a spatial relation parameter. Therefore, in this application, beam can be replaced by spatial filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, quasi-co-location (QCL) information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state) (including UL TCI state, downlink TCI state (downlink TCI state, DL TCI state)), or spatial relationship, etc. The above terms are also equivalent to each other. Beam can also be replaced by other terms representing beam, which is not limited in this application.
发送端通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等。The transmitter can send the same information or different information through different beams. Optionally, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as one beam. One beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals, etc.
用于发送信号的波束可以称为发送波束(transmission beam,Tx beam),空域发送滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter),空间发送滤波器(spatial transmission filter),空域发送参数(spatial domain transmission parameter),空间发送参数(spatial transmission parameter),空域发送设置(spatial domain transmission setting),或者空间发送设置(spatial transmission setting)。上行发送波束可以通过空间关系、TCI-state、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)资源(表示使用该SRS的发送波束)中任一种来指示。因此,上行发送波束还可以替换为SRS资源。A beam used to transmit a signal may be referred to as a transmission beam (Tx beam), a spatial domain transmission filter, a spatial transmission filter, a spatial domain transmission parameter, a spatial transmission parameter, a spatial domain transmission setting, or a spatial transmission setting. An uplink transmit beam may be indicated by any of a spatial relationship, a TCI-state, and a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource (indicating a transmit beam using the SRS). Therefore, an uplink transmit beam may also be replaced by an SRS resource.
用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam,Rx beam),空域接收滤波器(spatial domain reception filter),空间接收滤波器(spatial reception filter),空域接收参数(spatial domain reception parameter)或者空间接收参数(spatial reception parameter),空域接收设置(spatial domain reception setting),或者空间接收设置(spatial reception setting)。The beam used to receive the signal can be called a reception beam (Rx beam), a spatial domain reception filter, a spatial reception filter, or a spatial reception parameter. domain reception parameter) or spatial reception parameter, spatial domain reception setting, or spatial reception setting.
例如,发送波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。可以理解的是,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。For example, a transmit beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions of space after a signal is transmitted by an antenna, and a receive beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions of space of a wireless signal received from an antenna. It is understandable that one or more antenna ports forming a beam may also be regarded as an antenna port set.
发送端在使用低频或中频频段时,可以全向发送信号或者通过一个较宽的角度来发送信号。而在使用高频频段时,得益于高频通信系统较小的载波波长,可以在发送端和接收端布置很多天线阵子构成的天线阵列,发送端以一定波束赋形权值发送信号,使发送信号形成具有空间指向性的波束,同时在接收端用天线阵列以一定波束赋形权值进行接收。有利于提高信号在接收端的接收功率,对抗路径损耗。When the transmitter uses low-frequency or medium-frequency bands, it can send signals omnidirectionally or at a wider angle. When using high-frequency bands, thanks to the smaller carrier wavelength of the high-frequency communication system, an antenna array consisting of many antenna elements can be arranged at the transmitter and receiver. The transmitter sends signals with a certain beamforming weight, so that the transmitted signal forms a beam with spatial directivity. At the same time, the antenna array is used at the receiver to receive the signal with a certain beamforming weight. This is beneficial to increase the received power of the signal at the receiver and combat path loss.
QCL:准同位关系用于表示多个资源之间具有一个或多个相同或者相类似的通信特征。对于具有准同位关系的多个资源,可以采用相同或者类似的通信配置。例如,如果两个天线端口具有准同位关系,那么一个端口传送一个符号的信道大尺度特性可以从另一个端口传送一个符号的信道大尺度特性推断出来。大尺度特性可以包括:延迟扩展,平均延迟,多普勒扩展,多普勒频移,平均增益,接收参数,终端设备接收波束编号,发射/接收信道相关性,接收到达角,接收机天线的空间相关性,主到达角(angel-of-arrival,AoA),平均到达角,AoA的扩展等。具体的,该同位指示用于指示至少两组天线端口是否具有同位关系包括:同位指示用于指示至少两组天线端口发送的信道状态信息参考信号是否来自相同的传输点,或同位指示用于指示至少两组天线端口发送的信道状态信息参考信号是否来自相同的波束组。QCL: Quasi-colocation relationship is used to indicate that multiple resources have one or more identical or similar communication characteristics. For multiple resources with quasi-colocation relationship, the same or similar communication configuration can be adopted. For example, if two antenna ports have a quasi-colocation relationship, the large-scale characteristics of the channel for transmitting a symbol on one port can be inferred from the large-scale characteristics of the channel for transmitting a symbol on the other port. Large-scale characteristics may include: delay spread, average delay, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, receiving parameters, terminal device receiving beam number, transmit/receive channel correlation, receive arrival angle, spatial correlation of receiver antenna, main arrival angle (angel-of-arrival, AoA), average arrival angle, extension of AoA, etc. Specifically, the colocation indication is used to indicate whether at least two groups of antenna ports have a colocation relationship, including: the colocation indication is used to indicate whether the channel state information reference signals sent by at least two groups of antenna ports are from the same transmission point, or the colocation indication is used to indicate whether the channel state information reference signals sent by at least two groups of antenna ports are from the same beam group.
公共波束:在R17中引入统一TCI(unified TCI)。统一TCI是一种统一波束指示框架。网络设备可以为终端设备指示一个波束,该波束可以同时用于一个或多个信道、一种或多种信道、一个或多个参考信号、和/或,一种或多种参考信号的传输。该波束可以理解为公共波束。公共波束可以是上行公共波束、下行公共波束、或上下行公共波束。Public beam: Unified TCI is introduced in R17. Unified TCI is a unified beam indication framework. A network device can indicate a beam to a terminal device, and the beam can be used for the transmission of one or more channels, one or more channels, one or more reference signals, and/or one or more reference signals at the same time. The beam can be understood as a public beam. A public beam can be an uplink public beam, a downlink public beam, or an uplink and downlink public beam.
信道包括但不限于至少一种:物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)、物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)、物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)、物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)。参考信号包括但不限于至少一种:同步信号块和物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block,SSB)、CSI-RS、DMRS、相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)、时频跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)等。Channels include but are not limited to at least one of: physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), and physical random access channel (PRACH). Reference signals include but are not limited to at least one of: synchronization signal block and physical broadcast channel block (SSB), CSI-RS, DMRS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), time-frequency tracking reference signal (TRS), and sounding reference signal (SRS).
上下行公共波束:同时用于上行的至少一个信道或至少一个参考信号的传输,和用于下行的至少一个信道或至少一个参考信号的传输。例如,PDCCH,PDSCH,PUCCH和PUSCH。上下行公共波束也可以称为联合(joint)公共波束。Uplink and downlink common beam: used for transmission of at least one uplink channel or at least one reference signal, and at least one downlink channel or at least one reference signal. For example, PDCCH, PDSCH, PUCCH and PUSCH. Uplink and downlink common beams can also be called joint common beams.
上行公共波束:同时用于上行的多个信道的传输,和/或,同时用于上行的多种信道的传输,和/或,同时用于上行的一个或多个参考信号的传输。例如,PUCCH、PUSCH和SRS。Uplink common beam: used for transmission of multiple uplink channels at the same time, and/or, used for transmission of multiple uplink channels at the same time, and/or, used for transmission of one or more uplink reference signals at the same time, for example, PUCCH, PUSCH and SRS.
下行公共波束:同时用于下行的多个信道的传输,和/或,同时用于下行的多种信道的传输,和/或,同时用于下行的一个或多个参考信号的传输。例如PDCCH、PDSCH和CSI-RS。Downlink common beam: used for transmission of multiple downlink channels at the same time, and/or, used for transmission of multiple downlink channels at the same time, and/or, used for transmission of one or more downlink reference signals at the same time, such as PDCCH, PDSCH and CSI-RS.
参考信号资源:在通信协议中,没有直接采用波束这个词来表征波束,而是采用其他地方来隐式的描述波束相关的操作。例如,波束测量过程中,波束与参考信号资源具有对应关系(例如,网络设备采用一个波束发送该波束对应的参考信号资源),终端设备测量该参考信号资源的质量即等于测量该波束的质量。对于下行方向,参考信号资源可以是信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)资源或同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization system/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block)资源。其中,SS/PBCH block可以简称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)。对于上行方向,参考信号资源可以是探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)资源或解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)资源。Reference signal resources: In the communication protocol, the word beam is not directly used to characterize the beam, but other places are used to implicitly describe beam-related operations. For example, during the beam measurement process, the beam and the reference signal resource have a corresponding relationship (for example, the network device uses a beam to send the reference signal resource corresponding to the beam), and the terminal device measures the quality of the reference signal resource, which is equivalent to measuring the quality of the beam. For the downlink direction, the reference signal resource can be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) resource or a synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SS/PBCH block) resource. Among them, SS/PBCH block can be referred to as synchronization signal block (SSB). For the uplink direction, the reference signal resource can be a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource or a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) resource.
每个参考信号资源具有唯一的索引,用于标识对应的参考信号的资源。可以理解的是,参考信号资源的索引也可以称为该参考信号资源的标识,具体本申请不做限定。 Each reference signal resource has a unique index, which is used to identify the corresponding reference signal resource. It can be understood that the index of the reference signal resource can also be called the identifier of the reference signal resource, which is not specifically limited in this application.
TCI:也可以称为TCI状态(TCI-state)。在上下行传输中,网络设备和终端设备之间都需要采用正确的波束才能实现正确传输。在下行传输中,网络设备需要向终端设备指示其采用的下行发送波束。终端设备可以根据该下行发送波束确定合适的接收波束,该接收波束用于接收来自网络设备的信息。在上行传输中,网络设备也需要向终端设备指示终端设备采用哪个上行发送波束向网络设备发送信息。网络设备可以确定终端设备的信号质量较好的上行发送波束。上行发送波束和下行发送波束都可以通过相应的TCI状态来指示。具体的,下行发送波束可以通过DL TCI状态来指示,上行发送波束可以通过UL TCI状态来指示。TCI: It can also be called TCI state (TCI-state). In uplink and downlink transmission, the correct beams need to be used between the network device and the terminal device to achieve correct transmission. In downlink transmission, the network device needs to indicate to the terminal device the downlink transmission beam it uses. The terminal device can determine the appropriate receiving beam based on the downlink transmission beam, and the receiving beam is used to receive information from the network device. In uplink transmission, the network device also needs to indicate to the terminal device which uplink transmission beam the terminal device uses to send information to the network device. The network device can determine the uplink transmission beam with better signal quality for the terminal device. Both the uplink transmission beam and the downlink transmission beam can be indicated by the corresponding TCI state. Specifically, the downlink transmission beam can be indicated by the DL TCI state, and the uplink transmission beam can be indicated by the UL TCI state.
在3GPP协议中,网络设备可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的TCI字段向终端设备指示TCI状态。TCI字段的大小为3比特,可以具体表示为8种不同的字段值(也称为代码点)(codepoint)。TCI字段的每种字段值可以关联一个TCI状态的索引。该TCI状态的索引可以唯一标识一个TCI状态,该TCI状态可以是一个DL TCI状态或一个UL TCI状态。TCI字段的每种字段值也可以关联两个TCI状态索引,该两个TCI状态索引可以唯一标识两个TCI状态,该两个TCI状态可以包括一个DL TCI状态和一个UL TCI状态。In the 3GPP protocol, a network device can indicate the TCI state to a terminal device through the TCI field in the downlink control information (DCI). The size of the TCI field is 3 bits, which can be specifically represented as 8 different field values (also called code points). Each field value of the TCI field can be associated with an index of a TCI state. The index of the TCI state can uniquely identify a TCI state, which can be a DL TCI state or a UL TCI state. Each field value of the TCI field can also be associated with two TCI state indexes, which can uniquely identify two TCI states, which can include a DL TCI state and a UL TCI state.
DL TCI状态包括若干参数,终端设备可以通过这些参数确定下行发送波束的相关信息,从而确定采用合适的接收波束接收来自网络设备的信息。TCI状态是由网络设备配置给各个终端设备的,DL TCI状态的结构如下述所示:
The DL TCI state includes several parameters, through which the terminal device can determine the relevant information of the downlink transmit beam, thereby determining to use the appropriate receive beam to receive information from the network device. The TCI state is configured by the network device to each terminal device. The structure of the DL TCI state is shown below:
每个TCI状态包括一个自身的索引(tci-StateId)和两个准共址信息(quasi-colocation information,QCL-info)。每个QCL-info包括一个参考信号资源,用于表示该TCI状态的下行传输应该采用与该参考信号资源相同的下行定时、频偏或接收波束。具体由该QCL-info的类型来决定。QCL类型可以有四种取值{typeA,typeB,typeC,typeD}。QCL类型是typeA,typeB和typeC时,应该采用和该参考信号资源相同的下行定时和频偏进行下行传输。QCL类型为typeD时,应该采用和该参考信号资源相同的接收波束进行下行传输。上述两个QCL-info中,一个的类型是typeD,另一个的类型是typeA或typeB或typeC。终端设备通过typeD的QCL-info即可判断采用哪个接收波束来接收对应的下行传输。具体执行步骤如下:Each TCI state includes an index of its own (tci-StateId) and two quasi-colocation information (QCL-info). Each QCL-info includes a reference signal resource, which is used to indicate that the downlink transmission of the TCI state should use the same downlink timing, frequency offset or receiving beam as the reference signal resource. It is specifically determined by the type of the QCL-info. The QCL type can have four values {typeA, typeB, typeC, typeD}. When the QCL type is typeA, typeB and typeC, the downlink transmission should be carried out using the same downlink timing and frequency offset as the reference signal resource. When the QCL type is typeD, the downlink transmission should be carried out using the same receiving beam as the reference signal resource. Of the above two QCL-info, one is of typeD and the other is of typeA or typeB or typeC. The terminal device can determine which receiving beam to use to receive the corresponding downlink transmission through the QCL-info of typeD. The specific execution steps are as follows:
网络设备通过DCI为终端设备指示某个DL TCI状态。终端设备确定该DL TCI状态种的类型为typeD的QCL信息中的参考信号资源。终端设备将该参考信号资源的接收波束作为下行传输采用的接收波束。需要说明的是,该参考信号资源的接收波束是终端设备提前通过波束管理流程获取到的。通过波束管理流程,终端设备可以确定采用哪个接收波束接收该参考信号资源是最好的,并将该接收波束作为该参考信号资源的接收波束。The network device indicates a DL TCI state to the terminal device through DCI. The terminal device determines the reference signal resource in the QCL information of type D in the DL TCI state. The terminal device uses the receiving beam of the reference signal resource as the receiving beam used for downlink transmission. It should be noted that the receiving beam of the reference signal resource is obtained by the terminal device in advance through the beam management process. Through the beam management process, the terminal device can determine which receiving beam is the best to receive the reference signal resource, and use the receiving beam as the receiving beam of the reference signal resource.
UL TCI状态包括参考信号资源,用于表示采用该TCI状态的上行传输应该采用与该参考信号资源相
同的上行发送波束。终端设备通过该参考信号资源即可判断采用哪个发送波束来进行上行传输。在UL TCI状态中,参考信号资源不包含在QCL-info中,也不区分QCL类型,因为不需要参考上行定时和频偏信息,只需要参考上行发送波束。UL TCI状态的结构如下述所示:
The UL TCI state includes a reference signal resource, which is used to indicate that the uplink transmission using the TCI state should use the same signal as the reference signal resource. The terminal device can determine which transmission beam to use for uplink transmission through the reference signal resource. In the UL TCI state, the reference signal resource is not included in the QCL-info, and the QCL type is not distinguished, because there is no need to refer to the uplink timing and frequency offset information, only the uplink transmission beam is needed. The structure of the UL TCI state is shown below:
具体执行步骤如下:The specific steps are as follows:
网络设备通过DCI为终端设备指示某个UL TCI状态。终端设备确定该UL TCI状态中的参考信号资源。终端设备将该参考信号资源的发送波束作为终端设备进行上行传输采用的发送波束。需要说明的是,该参考信号资源的发送波束是终端设备提前通过波束管理流程获取到的。The network device indicates a UL TCI state to the terminal device through DCI. The terminal device determines the reference signal resource in the UL TCI state. The terminal device uses the transmit beam of the reference signal resource as the transmit beam used by the terminal device for uplink transmission. It should be noted that the transmit beam of the reference signal resource is obtained by the terminal device in advance through the beam management process.
下面介绍TCI状态的配置,激活和指示。The following describes the configuration, activation and indication of TCI status.
TCI-state配置:网络设备通过RRC信令向终端设备配置多个TCI-state。这些TCI-state均包括一个类型为typeD的QCL-Info。网络设备也可以配置不包括类型为typeD的QCL-info的TCI-state,不过这些TCI-state不是用于数据传输波束的指示,故此处不进一步阐述。TCI-state configuration: The network device configures multiple TCI-states to the terminal device through RRC signaling. These TCI-states all include a QCL-Info of type D. The network device can also configure TCI-states that do not include QCL-info of type D, but these TCI-states are not used for data transmission beam indication, so they are not further explained here.
TCI-state激活:网络设备配置多个TCI-state后,还需要通过媒体接入控制控制元素(media access control control element,MAC-CE)激活其中8个TCI-state。这8个TCI-state与DCI中的TCI字段的8个值是一一对应的。即,DCI的TCI字段的8个值对应的是哪8个TCI-state,是通过MACCE来确定的。TCI-state activation: After the network device is configured with multiple TCI-states, it is also necessary to activate 8 of them through the media access control element (MAC-CE). These 8 TCI-states correspond to the 8 values of the TCI field in the DCI. That is, the 8 values of the TCI field in the DCI correspond to which 8 TCI-states are determined by MACCE.
TCI状态指示:网络设备通过DCI中的TCI字段来指示一个具体的TCI-state。例如,网络设备发送给终端设备的DCI中的TCI字段的值为000,表示数据传输波束采用的000对应的TCI状态。该TCI状态内的类型为typeD的QCL-Info所包含的参考信号是索引为#1的信道状态信息-参考信号(channel state information–reference signal,CSI-RS),表示数据传输采用的波束与索引为#1的CSI-RS对应的接收波束是相同的。索引为#1的CSI-RS对应的接收波束可通过波束测量流程来确定,对终端设备来说是已知的。因此,通过TCI字段的具体取值,终端设备就可以确定数据传输波束对应的波束,从而采用相应的波束来发送或接收数据。TCI state indication: The network device indicates a specific TCI-state through the TCI field in the DCI. For example, the value of the TCI field in the DCI sent by the network device to the terminal device is 000, indicating that the data transmission beam adopts the TCI state corresponding to 000. The reference signal contained in the QCL-Info of type D in the TCI state is the channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) with an index of #1, indicating that the beam used for data transmission is the same as the receiving beam corresponding to the CSI-RS with an index of #1. The receiving beam corresponding to the CSI-RS with an index of #1 can be determined through the beam measurement process and is known to the terminal device. Therefore, through the specific value of the TCI field, the terminal device can determine the beam corresponding to the data transmission beam, and thus use the corresponding beam to send or receive data.
需要说明的是,本文中TCI state、TCI-state和TCI状态这三种描述方式可以互相替换。It should be noted that the three descriptions of TCI state, TCI-state and TCI state in this article can be used interchangeably.
例如,如图3A所示,MAC CE用于激活一个或多个TCI状态。每个TCI状态对应的一个波束。具体的,该MAC CE中包括该一个或多个TCI状态分别对应的TCI状态标识。一个TCI状态可以映射到一个代码点,或者两个TCI状态可以映射到一个代码点。代码点可以通过一个或多个比特表示。具体该一个或多个比特包括的比特数量与该MAC CE激活的TCI状态数量相关。网络设备可以通过DCI中的TCI字段指示相应的代码点,从而通过代码点指示相应的TCI状态。例如,MAC CE激活两个TCI状态,一个TCI状态映射到一个代码点,那么每个TCI状态对于的代码点可以通过1比特标识。例如,代码点1的取值为0,代码点1用于指示一个TCI状态,代码点2的取值为1,代码点2用于指示另外一个TCI状态。再例如,MAC CE激活三个TCI状态,其中一个TCI状态映射到到代码点1,另外两个TCI状态映射到代码点2。For example, as shown in FIG3A , MAC CE is used to activate one or more TCI states. Each TCI state corresponds to a beam. Specifically, the MAC CE includes TCI state identifiers corresponding to the one or more TCI states. One TCI state can be mapped to one code point, or two TCI states can be mapped to one code point. The code point can be represented by one or more bits. Specifically, the number of bits included in the one or more bits is related to the number of TCI states activated by the MAC CE. The network device can indicate the corresponding code point through the TCI field in the DCI, thereby indicating the corresponding TCI state through the code point. For example, MAC CE activates two TCI states, and one TCI state is mapped to one code point, then the code point corresponding to each TCI state can be identified by 1 bit. For example, the value of code point 1 is 0, code point 1 is used to indicate a TCI state, and the value of code point 2 is 1, and code point 2 is used to indicate another TCI state. For another example, MAC CE activates three TCI states, one of which is mapped to code point 1, and the other two TCI states are mapped to code point 2.
另外,如图3A所示,MAC CE中的D/U字段的取值确定MAC CE激活的TCI状态的类型。如图6所示,MAC CE中的Qct4所在的行中的D/U字段的取值为0,则终端设备可以以确定该Oct4所在的行中的后7 比特指示的是UL TCI状态。MAC CE中的Oct5所在的行中的D/U字段的取值为1,则终端设备可以确定该Oct5所在的行中的后7比特指示的是joint/DL TCI状态。关于UL TCI状态和joint/DL TCI状态请参阅后文的相关介绍。In addition, as shown in FIG3A , the value of the D/U field in the MAC CE determines the type of TCI state activated by the MAC CE. As shown in FIG6 , the value of the D/U field in the row where Qct4 in the MAC CE is located is 0, then the terminal device can determine the last 7 in the row where Oct4 is located. The bit indicates the UL TCI state. If the value of the D/U field in the row where Oct5 in the MAC CE is located is 1, the terminal device can determine that the last 7 bits in the row where Oct5 is located indicate the joint/DL TCI state. For more information about the UL TCI state and the joint/DL TCI state, please refer to the relevant introduction below.
TCI模式:包括共同(joint)模式和分离(separate)模式。共同模式是指TRP与终端设备之间的上行传输和下行传输都采用相同的波束。分离模式是指TRP与终端设备之间的上行传输和TRP与终端设备之间的下行传输采用不同的波束。TCI mode: includes joint mode and separate mode. The joint mode means that the same beam is used for both uplink and downlink transmission between the TRP and the terminal device. The separate mode means that different beams are used for uplink transmission between the TRP and the terminal device and for downlink transmission between the TRP and the terminal device.
PHR MAC CE:用于上报功率余量,以及一个或多个参考信号资源对应的功率衰减量。功率余量是指终端设备允许的最大传输功率与终端设备的上行发送信道估算功率的差值。每个参考信号资源对应的功率衰减量是指针对该参考信号资源,为了满足MPE应用的功率回退值。可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源为下行参考信号资源。PHR MAC CE: used to report the power margin and the power attenuation corresponding to one or more reference signal resources. The power margin refers to the difference between the maximum transmission power allowed by the terminal device and the estimated power of the uplink transmission channel of the terminal device. The power attenuation corresponding to each reference signal resource refers to the power fallback value for the reference signal resource in order to meet the MPE application. Optionally, the one or more reference signal resources are downlink reference signal resources.
本申请中,上行TCI状态、UL TCI状态和UL TCI state可以相互替换,下行/共同TCI状态、joint/DL TCI state和joint/DL TCI状态可以相互替换。下行TCI状态、DL TCI状态和DL TCI state可以相互替换。In this application, uplink TCI state, UL TCI state and UL TCI state can be replaced with each other, downlink/common TCI state, joint/DL TCI state and joint/DL TCI state can be replaced with each other. Downlink TCI state, DL TCI state and DL TCI state can be replaced with each other.
下面结合图3B介绍PHR MAC CE的一种可能的格式。A possible format of PHR MAC CE is introduced below in conjunction with Figure 3B.
如图3B所示,PHR MAC CE中,当频段范围2(frequency range 2,FR2)频段配置了频段范围2的最大功率衰减上报(mpe-Reporting-FR2),且功率管理最大功率衰减(power management maximum power reduction,P_MPR)小于P-MPR_00,P字段的取值置为0,否则P字段的取值置为1。如果FR2频段未配置mpe-Reporting-FR2或终端设备工作在频段范围1(frequency range 1,FR1)频段,P字段用于指示是否进行功率回退,若有功率回退,PCMAX,f,c将置不同的值,P字段的取值置为1。As shown in FIG3B , in the PHR MAC CE, when the frequency range 2 (FR2) frequency band is configured with the maximum power reduction reporting (mpe-Reporting-FR2) of the frequency range 2, and the power management maximum power reduction (P_MPR) is less than P-MPR_00, the value of the P field is set to 0, otherwise the value of the P field is set to 1. If the FR2 frequency band is not configured with mpe-Reporting-FR2 or the terminal device operates in the frequency range 1 (FR1) frequency band, the P field is used to indicate whether power backoff is performed. If power backoff is performed, PCMAX,f,c will be set to different values, and the value of the P field is set to 1.
R字段为保留字段。PH字段用于指示功率余量水平。功率余量水平是终端设备的上行发送信道估算功率和终端设备的最大发射功率之间的差值。The R field is a reserved field. The PH field is used to indicate the power headroom level. The power headroom level is the difference between the estimated uplink transmission channel power of the terminal device and the maximum transmission power of the terminal device.
当FR2频段配置了mpe-Reporting-FR2,且P字段的取值等于1时,该MPE字段指示为了满足MPE的功率回退值应用的功率回退值。不同的功率回退值,MPE字段的取值不同。具体如表2所示。当FR2频段没有配置mpe-Reporting-FR2,或终端设备工作在FR1频段,或P字段的取值等于0,则MPE字段为保留字段。When mpe-Reporting-FR2 is configured for the FR2 band, and the value of the P field is equal to 1, the MPE field indicates the power backoff value applied to meet the power backoff value of MPE. The value of the MPE field is different for different power backoff values. See Table 2 for details. When mpe-Reporting-FR2 is not configured for the FR2 band, or the terminal device operates in the FR1 band, or the value of the P field is equal to 0, the MPE field is a reserved field.
表2
Table 2
Bi字段用于指示参考信号资源i是否存在,当Bi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i存在。The Bi field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i exists. When the value of the Bi field is 1, it means that the reference signal resource i exists.
对于Pi字段,当FR频段配置了mpe-Reporting-FR2,P-MPR小于P-MPR_00,则Pi字段的取值置为0,否则Pi字段的取值置为1。For the Pi field, when the FR band is configured with mpe-Reporting-FR2 and P-MPR is less than P-MPR_00, the value of the Pi field is set to 0; otherwise, the value of the Pi field is set to 1.
对于MPEi字段,当FR2频段配置了mpe-Reporting-FR2-r17且P字段等于1时,该MPEi字段指示为了满足MPE的功率回退值应用的功率回退值。具体如图表2所示。当没有配置mpe-Reporting-FR2,或终端设备工作在FR1频段,或P字段的取值等于0,则MPEi字段为保留字段。For the MPEi field, when mpe-Reporting-FR2-r17 is configured for the FR2 band and the P field is equal to 1, the MPEi field indicates the power backoff value applied to meet the MPE power backoff value. See Figure 2 for details. When mpe-Reporting-FR2 is not configured, or the terminal device operates in the FR1 band, or the value of the P field is equal to 0, the MPEi field is a reserved field.
在R17中引入统一TCI(unified TCI),统一TCI是一种统一波束指示框架。网络设备可以为终端设备指示一个波束,该波束同时用于多个信道和/或参考信号。该波束可以理解为上述技术术语所示的公共波束。公共波束可以是上行公共波束,下行公共波束或上下行公共波束。网络设备可以为终端设备指示一个公共波束,用于多个上行信道和/或多个上行参考信号的传输。终端设备可以使用该公共波束 进行上行传输。网络设备也可以为终端设备指示一个下行公共波束,用于多个下行信道和/或多个下行参考信号的传输。终端设备可以使用该下行公共波束进行下行传输。或者,网络设备也可以为终端设备指示一个上下行公共波束,用于多个上行信道、多个上行参考信号、多个下行信道和/或多个下行参考信号的传输。终端设备可以使用该上下行公共波束进行上行传输和下行传输。Unified TCI (unified TCI) is introduced in R17. Unified TCI is a unified beam indication framework. The network device can indicate a beam to the terminal device, and the beam is used for multiple channels and/or reference signals at the same time. The beam can be understood as the common beam shown in the above technical terms. The common beam can be an uplink common beam, a downlink common beam, or an uplink and downlink common beam. The network device can indicate a common beam to the terminal device for the transmission of multiple uplink channels and/or multiple uplink reference signals. The terminal device can use the common beam The network device may also indicate a downlink common beam to the terminal device for transmission of multiple downlink channels and/or multiple downlink reference signals. The terminal device may use the downlink common beam for downlink transmission. Alternatively, the network device may also indicate an uplink and downlink common beam to the terminal device for transmission of multiple uplink channels, multiple uplink reference signals, multiple downlink channels and/or multiple downlink reference signals. The terminal device may use the uplink and downlink common beam for uplink and downlink transmission.
在R17中,网络设备可以为终端设备配置两种TCI状态,分别为下行/共同TCI状态(joint/DL TCI state)以及UL TCI状态。例如,终端设备可以同时配置至多128个joint/DL TCI状态和至多64个UL TCI状态。UL TCI状态对应的波束可以作为终端设备进行上行传输的波束。该UL TCI状态对应的波束可以理解为前述介绍的上行公共波束。在共同模式下,joint/DL TCI状态可以称为joint TCI状态,joint TCI状态对应的波束作为终端设备进行下行传输和上行传输的波束。该joint TCI状态对应的波束可以理解为上下行公共波束。而在分离模式,joint/DL TCI状态可以称为DL TCI状态,该DL TCI状态对应的波束作为终端设备进行上行传输的波束。DL TCI状态对应的波束可以理解为前述介绍的下行公共波束。In R17, the network device can configure two TCI states for the terminal device, namely the downlink/common TCI state (joint/DL TCI state) and the UL TCI state. For example, the terminal device can configure up to 128 joint/DL TCI states and up to 64 UL TCI states at the same time. The beam corresponding to the UL TCI state can be used as the beam for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. The beam corresponding to the UL TCI state can be understood as the uplink common beam introduced above. In the common mode, the joint/DL TCI state can be called the joint TCI state, and the beam corresponding to the joint TCI state is used as the beam for the terminal device to perform downlink and uplink transmission. The beam corresponding to the joint TCI state can be understood as the uplink and downlink common beam. In the separate mode, the joint/DL TCI state can be called the DL TCI state, and the beam corresponding to the DL TCI state is used as the beam for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission. The beam corresponding to the DL TCI state can be understood as the downlink common beam introduced above.
网络设备可以在RRC信令中的服务小区配置(serving cell config)配置终端设备当前使用的TCI模式。该TCI模式可以是共同模式或分离模式。在共同模式下,网络设备向终端设备指示的joint TCI状态,该joint TCI状态可同时用于上下行传输。在分离模式下,网络设备向终端设备指示DL TCI状态和UL TCI状态,该DL TCI状态用于下行传输,该UL TCI状态用于上行传输。The network device can configure the TCI mode currently used by the terminal device in the serving cell configuration (serving cell config) in the RRC signaling. The TCI mode can be a common mode or a separate mode. In the common mode, the network device indicates the joint TCI state to the terminal device, and the joint TCI state can be used for both uplink and downlink transmission. In the separate mode, the network device indicates the DL TCI state and the UL TCI state to the terminal device, and the DL TCI state is used for downlink transmission, and the UL TCI state is used for uplink transmission.
如上述图3A所示,若RRC配置终端设备为共同模式,MAC CE中的TCI状态ID为joint TCI状态的标识。若RRC配置终端设备为分离模式,则终端设备根据MAC CE中的D/U字段的取值确定TCI状态ID为DL TCI状态还是UL TCI状态。As shown in Figure 3A above, if the RRC configures the terminal device to be in joint mode, the TCI state ID in the MAC CE is the identifier of the joint TCI state. If the RRC configures the terminal device to be in separate mode, the terminal device determines whether the TCI state ID is the DL TCI state or the UL TCI state based on the value of the D/U field in the MAC CE.
目前,考虑到电磁波对人体的辐射等,定义了MPE,即规定了在特定频率范围内运行的发射机的场强和功率密度的MPE。当网络设备配置终端设备使用共同模式,终端设备采用的上行波束和下行波束相同。当终端设备发生旋转、姿态变化或手持终端设备的姿势变化,由于MPE的限制,导致信号质量较好的上行波束和下行波束不一致。如果网络设备需要通过RRC信令重新配置终端设备采用分离模式,那么配置时延较大。影响终端设备的传输效率。因此,如何快速实现终端设备切换到分离模式,是值得考虑的问题。At present, taking into account the radiation of electromagnetic waves to the human body, MPE is defined, that is, MPE that specifies the field strength and power density of transmitters operating within a specific frequency range. When the network device configures the terminal device to use the common mode, the uplink beam and downlink beam used by the terminal device are the same. When the terminal device rotates, the posture changes, or the posture of the handheld terminal device changes, due to the limitation of MPE, the uplink beam and downlink beam with better signal quality are inconsistent. If the network device needs to reconfigure the terminal device to use the separation mode through RRC signaling, the configuration delay is large. Affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device. Therefore, how to quickly switch the terminal device to the separation mode is a problem worth considering.
本申请提供了相应的技术方案,用于实现触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。具体可以参阅后文图4和图5所示的实施例的相关介绍。The present application provides a corresponding technical solution for triggering a terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode. It is not necessary for a network device to configure the terminal device to switch to a separate mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device. For details, please refer to the relevant introduction of the embodiments shown in Figures 4 and 5 below.
下面结合具体实施例介绍本申请的技术方案。The technical solution of the present application is introduced below in conjunction with specific embodiments.
图4为本申请实施例测量结果发送方法、测量结果接收方法的一个实施例示意图。请参阅图4,方法包括:FIG4 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a method for sending measurement results and a method for receiving measurement results according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG4 , the method includes:
401、终端设备测量一个或多个参考信号资源。401. A terminal device measures one or more reference signal resources.
具体的,终端设备可以根据一个或多个参考信号资源的配置信息测量该一个或多个参考信号资源,得到该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果。Specifically, the terminal device may measure the one or more reference signal resources according to the configuration information of the one or more reference signal resources to obtain the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括该一个或多个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源的测量结果。Optionally, the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources include the measurement results of each reference signal resource in the one or more reference signal resources.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括以下至少一项:该一个或多个参考信号资源的索引,该一个或多个参考信号资源的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP),层1干扰信噪比(layer1-signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio,L1-SINR),能力参数(集)索引(Capability[Set]Index),秩指示(rank indication,RI),信道质量信息(channel quality information,CQI),或,预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indication)。Optionally, the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources include at least one of the following: an index of the one or more reference signal resources, a reference signal receiving power (RSRP) of the one or more reference signal resources, a layer 1 interference signal-to-noise ratio (layer1-signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio, L1-SINR), a capability parameter (set) index (Capability[Set]Index), a rank indication (RI), a channel quality information (CQI), or a precoding matrix indication (precoding matrix indication).
可选的,在ORAN系统中,上述步骤401可以由表1所示的O-RU和/或0-DU网元执行。Optionally, in an ORAN system, the above step 401 may be performed by an O-RU and/or O-DU network element shown in Table 1.
可选的,一个或多个参考信号资源的索引可以为SSB资源索引(SSB index)或CSI-RS资源标识(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)。Optionally, the index of one or more reference signal resources can be an SSB resource index (SSB index) or a CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI).
402、终端设备向网络设备发送一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。相应的,网络设备接收来自终端设备的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。402. The terminal device sends the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information from the terminal device.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于 终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。换句话说,模式切换信息用于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当采用的上行波束和下行波束不一致;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由共同模式切换到分离模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device is to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to The terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. In other words, the mode switching information is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or, the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the uplink beam and downlink beam that the terminal device should adopt are inconsistent; or, the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式。换句话说,模式切换信息用于触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由分离模式切换到共同模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. In other words, the mode switching information is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from the separate mode to the common mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式。TCI模式包括共同模式和分离模式。例如,模式切换信息指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式。例如,终端设备从共同模式切换至分离模式。或者,终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. The TCI mode includes a common mode and a separate mode. For example, the mode switching information indicates switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. For example, the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. Alternatively, the terminal device switches from the separate mode to the common mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式。例如,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用共同模式。或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用分离模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. For example, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the common mode. Alternatively, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode.
一种可能的实现方式中,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息并列承载于测量信息中。也就是模式切换信息作为一种新的测量结果,与一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果并列存在于测量信息中。In a possible implementation, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and the mode switching information are carried in parallel in the measurement information. That is, the mode switching information is a new measurement result and exists in parallel with the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources in the measurement information.
另一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包含于一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果,也就是模式切换信息作为该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果中的其中一个测量结果。In another possible implementation manner, the mode switching information is included in the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources, that is, the mode switching information is one of the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources.
下面介绍模式切换信息的一些可能的实现方式。Some possible implementations of the mode switching information are described below.
实现方式1:模式切换信息通过第一字段指示。Implementation method 1: the mode switching information is indicated through the first field.
可选的,第一字段为测量信息中的一个字段,或者为一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果中的一个字段。Optionally, the first field is a field in the measurement information, or a field in the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources.
例如,如表3所示,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括CRI#1的RSRP1、CRI#2的RSRP2、CRI#3的RSRP3和CRI#4的RSRP4。模式切换信息为切换到分离模式(SwitchtoSeparate)信息,用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。For example, as shown in Table 3, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources include RSRP1 of CRI#1, RSRP2 of CRI#2, RSRP3 of CRI#3, and RSRP4 of CRI#4. The mode switching information is switch to separate mode (Switch to Separate) information, which is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
表3
Table 3
可选的,第一字段的长度为1比特或2比特,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the length of the first field is 1 bit or 2 bits, which is not specifically limited in this application.
一种可能的实现方式中,第一字段的取值为0时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。In a possible implementation, when the value of the first field is 0, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device is to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
在该实现方式中,需要说明的是,如果终端设备没有切换到分离模式的需求,第一字段的取值可以为1,用于指示终端设备继续保持处于共同模式。In this implementation, it should be noted that if the terminal device does not need to switch to the separate mode, the value of the first field may be 1, which is used to indicate that the terminal device continues to remain in the common mode.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一字段的取值为1时,第一字段用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。In another possible implementation, when the value of the first field is 1, the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device is to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
在该实现方式中,需要说明的是,如果终端设备没有切换到分离模式的需求,第一字段的取值可以为0,用于指示终端设备继续保持处于共同模式。In this implementation, it should be noted that if the terminal device does not need to switch to the separate mode, the value of the first field may be 0, which is used to indicate that the terminal device continues to remain in the common mode.
上述是第一字段用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式的情况。实际应用中,下面介绍第一字段的另一种可能的指示方式。The above is a case where the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. In practical applications, another possible indication method of the first field is introduced below.
可选的,当第一字段的取值为第一值时,则模式切换信息指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用分离模式。当第一字段的取值为第二值时,则模式切换信息指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息指示不切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用共同模式。例如,第一值为0,第二值为1;或者,第一值为1,第二值为 0。Optionally, when the value of the first field is a first value, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information indicates switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode. When the value of the first field is a second value, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information indicates not switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the common mode. For example, the first value is 0 and the second value is 1; or the first value is 1 and the second value is 0.
实现方式2:模式切换信息通过第二字段指示,第二字段用于指示一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或第二字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号的标识。该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识或该一个或多个参考信号的标识用于终端设备进行上行传输的参考信息索引。Implementation method 2: The mode switching information is indicated by the second field, and the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more UL TCI states, or the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more reference signals. The identifier of the one or more UL TCI states or the identifier of the one or more reference signals are used as reference information indexes for uplink transmission by the terminal device.
在该实现方式中,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用分离模式。In this implementation, the mode switching information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or, the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or, the mode switching information is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode.
例如,如表4所示,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括CRI#1的RSRP1、CRI#2的RSRP2、CRI#3的RSRP3和CRI#4的RSRP4。模式切换信息包括UL TCI state id1和UL TCI state id2,或者,模式切换信息包括RS id1和RS id2。其中,UL TCIstate id可以指示相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。RS id用于指示参考信号索引,终端设备根据该参考信号确定上行波束进行上行传输;也可以理解为终端设备参考具有相同参考信号索引的UL TCI状态进行上行传输;还可以理解为终端设备通过下行波束接收该参考信号,终端设备可以通过该下行波束确定相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。由此可知,终端设备通过该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或该一个或多个参考信号的标识隐式指示或间接指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或指示终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。For example, as shown in Table 4, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources include RSRP1 of CRI#1, RSRP2 of CRI#2, RSRP3 of CRI#3, and RSRP4 of CRI#4. The mode switching information includes UL TCI state id1 and UL TCI state id2, or the mode switching information includes RS id1 and RS id2. Among them, UL TCI state id can indicate the corresponding uplink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. RS id is used to indicate the reference signal index, and the terminal device determines the uplink beam for uplink transmission according to the reference signal; it can also be understood that the terminal device refers to the UL TCI state with the same reference signal index for uplink transmission; it can also be understood that the terminal device receives the reference signal through the downlink beam, the terminal device can determine the corresponding uplink beam through the downlink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. It can be seen from this that the terminal device implicitly or indirectly indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode through the identification of one or more UL TCI states, or the identification of one or more reference signals, or indicates that the terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
表4
Table 4
一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号的标识是测量集合中该一个或多个参考信号的标识。测量集合包括网络设备为终端设备配置的参考信号的标识。上述步骤401中的一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号属于该测量集合。例如,该测量集合包括10个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识,分别为标识1至标识10。该一个或多个参考信号的标识包括标识1、标识4和标识5。在该实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号的标识可以理解为该一个或多个参考信号的全局标识。In one possible implementation, the identifiers of the one or more reference signals are identifiers of the one or more reference signals in a measurement set. The measurement set includes identifiers of reference signals configured by a network device for a terminal device. The reference signals corresponding to one or more reference signal resources in the above step 401 belong to the measurement set. For example, the measurement set includes identifiers of reference signals corresponding to 10 reference signal resources, which are identifiers 1 to 10 respectively. The identifiers of the one or more reference signals include identifier 1, identifier 4 and identifier 5. In this implementation, the identifiers of the one or more reference signals can be understood as global identifiers of the one or more reference signals.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该一个或多个参考信号的标识是该一个或多个参考信号在一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的局部标识。例如,一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号包括测量集合中标识分别为1、5、6和7的参考信号。终端设备对该一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号进行局部排序,得到测量集合中标识为1的参考信号的局部标识为1,测量集合中标识为5的参考信号的局部标识为2,测量集合中标识为6的参考信号的局部标识为3以及测量集合中标识为7的参考信号的局部标识为4。该一个或多个参考信号的标识包括局部标识1和局部标识3。即该一个或多个参考信号包括局部标识1的参考信号和局部标识3的参考信号。In another possible implementation, the identifier of the one or more reference signals is a local identifier of the one or more reference signals in the reference signals corresponding to one or more reference signal resources. For example, the reference signals corresponding to the one or more reference signal resources include reference signals identified as 1, 5, 6 and 7 in the measurement set. The terminal device locally sorts the reference signals corresponding to the one or more reference signal resources, and obtains that the local identifier of the reference signal identified as 1 in the measurement set is 1, the local identifier of the reference signal identified as 5 in the measurement set is 2, the local identifier of the reference signal identified as 6 in the measurement set is 3, and the local identifier of the reference signal identified as 7 in the measurement set is 4. The identifiers of the one or more reference signals include a local identifier 1 and a local identifier 3. That is, the one or more reference signals include a reference signal with a local identifier 1 and a reference signal with a local identifier 3.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号是该一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的一个或多个参考信号。可选的,该一个或多个参考信号是网络设备给终端配置的探测参考信号资源集合(SRS resource set)中的一个或多个探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。Optionally, the one or more reference signals are one or more reference signals in the reference signals corresponding to the one or more reference signal resources. Optionally, the one or more reference signals are one or more sounding reference signals (SRS) in a sounding reference signal resource set (SRS resource set) configured by the network device for the terminal.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态中的参考信号标识为SSB索引(SSB index),或CSI-RS资源索引(CSI-RS index),或SRS资源索引(SRS-ResourceId)。Optionally, the reference signal identifier in the one or more UL TCI states is an SSB index (SSB index), or a CSI-RS resource index (CSI-RS index), or an SRS resource index (SRS-ResourceId).
需要说明的是,如果终端设备不存在切换到分离模式的需求,第二字段可以是特定字段,即第二字段不指示任何信息,代表终端设备继续采用共同模式。It should be noted that if the terminal device does not need to switch to the separation mode, the second field may be a specific field, that is, the second field does not indicate any information, indicating that the terminal device continues to use the common mode.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括上述实现方式1中的第一字段。第一字段指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一字段用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一字段指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,第一字段指示终端设备采用分离模式。该一 个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果还包括第二字段。Optionally, the measurement result of the one or more reference signal resources includes the first field in the above implementation mode 1. The first field indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first field is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first field indicates the TCI mode adopted by the switching terminal device, or the first field indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode. The measurement result of one or more reference signal resources also includes a second field.
实现方式3:模式切换信息通过第二字段指示,第二字段用于指示一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或所述第二字段用于指示一个或多个参考信号的标识。该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识或该一个或多个参考信号的标识用于终端设备进行上行传输的参考信息索引。Implementation method 3: The mode switching information is indicated by the second field, and the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more UL TCI states, or the second field is used to indicate the identifier of one or more reference signals. The identifier of the one or more UL TCI states or the identifier of the one or more reference signals are used as reference information indexes for uplink transmission by the terminal device.
其中,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联该一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识;或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联该一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识。Among them, each UL TCI state identifier among the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier among the one or more reference signal resource identifiers; or, each reference signal identifier among the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier among the one or more reference signal resource identifiers.
可选的,不同参考信号资源标识关联相同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联相同的参考信号的标识。或者,不同参考信号资源标识关联不同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联不同的参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以不同参考信号资源标识关联不同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联不同的参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, different reference signal resource identifiers are associated with the same UL TCI state identifier, or are associated with the same reference signal identifier. Alternatively, different reference signal resource identifiers are associated with different UL TCI state identifiers, or are associated with different reference signal identifiers. The examples below mainly use different reference signal resource identifiers associated with different UL TCI state identifiers, or are associated with different reference signal identifiers as an example for explanation.
可选的,同一参考信号资源标识关联多个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联多个参考信号的标识。或者,同一参考信号资源标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以同一参考信号资源标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, the same reference signal resource identifier is associated with multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or is associated with multiple reference signal identifiers. Alternatively, the same reference signal resource identifier is associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier. The following examples mainly use the example of the same reference signal resource identifier being associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识与该一个或多个参考信号资源标识一一对应,即一个参考信号资源标识对应一个UL TCI状态,不同参考信号资源标识对应不同的UL TCI状态。或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识与该一个或多个参考信号资源标识一一对应,即一个参考信号资源标识对应一个参考信号的标识,不同参考信号资源标识对应不同的参考信号的标识。Optionally, the one or more UL TCI state identifiers correspond one-to-one with the one or more reference signal resource identifiers, that is, one reference signal resource identifier corresponds to one UL TCI state, and different reference signal resource identifiers correspond to different UL TCI states. Alternatively, the one or more reference signal identifiers correspond one-to-one with the one or more reference signal resource identifiers, that is, one reference signal resource identifier corresponds to one reference signal identifier, and different reference signal resource identifiers correspond to different reference signal identifiers.
例如,如表5所示,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括CRI#1的RSRP1、CRI#2的RSRP2、CRI#3的RSRP3和CRI#4的RSRP4。模式切换信息包括CRI#1关联的UL TCIstate id1或RS id1、CRI#2关联的UL TCI state id2或RS id2、CRI#3关联UL TCI state id3或RS id3和CRI#4关联UL TCI state id4或RS id4。其中,UL TCIstate id可以指示相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。RS id用于指示参考信号索引,终端设备根据该参考信号确定上行波束进行上行传输;也可以理解为终端设备参考具有相同参考信号索引的UL state进行上行传输;还可以理解为终端设备通过下行波束接收该参考信号,终端设备可以通过该下行波束确定相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。由此可知,终端设备通过该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或该一个或多个参考信号的标识隐式指示或间接指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或指示终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。For example, as shown in Table 5, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources include RSRP1 of CRI#1, RSRP2 of CRI#2, RSRP3 of CRI#3, and RSRP4 of CRI#4. The mode switching information includes UL TCIstate id1 or RS id1 associated with CRI#1, UL TCI state id2 or RS id2 associated with CRI#2, UL TCI state id3 or RS id3 associated with CRI#3, and UL TCI state id4 or RS id4 associated with CRI#4. Among them, UL TCIstate id can indicate the corresponding uplink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. RS id is used to indicate the reference signal index, and the terminal device determines the uplink beam for uplink transmission based on the reference signal; it can also be understood that the terminal device refers to the UL state with the same reference signal index for uplink transmission; it can also be understood that the terminal device receives the reference signal through the downlink beam, the terminal device can determine the corresponding uplink beam through the downlink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. It can be seen that the terminal device implicitly indicates or indirectly indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separate mode through the identification of one or more UL TCI states, or the identification of one or more reference signals, or indicates that the terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
在该实现方式中,需要说明的是,每个参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识可以理解为每个参考信号资源对应的模式切换信息。In this implementation, it should be noted that the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with each reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal can be understood as the mode switching information corresponding to each reference signal resource.
表5
Table 5
关于该一个或多个参考信号的标识可以参阅前述实现方式2中的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。For the identification of the one or more reference signals, please refer to the relevant introduction in the aforementioned implementation method 2, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号是该一个或多个参考信号资源对应的参考信号中的一个或多个参考信号。Optionally, the one or more reference signals are one or more reference signals among the reference signals corresponding to the one or more reference signal resources.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号是网络设备给终端配置的探测参考信号资源集合(SRS resource set)中的一个或多个探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。Optionally, the one or more reference signals are one or more sounding reference signals (SRS) in a sounding reference signal resource set (SRS resource set) configured by the network device for the terminal.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态中的参考信号标识为SSB索引(SSB index),或CSI-RS资源索引(CSI-RS index),或SRS资源索引(SRS-ResourceId)。Optionally, the reference signal identifier in the one or more UL TCI states is an SSB index (SSB index), or a CSI-RS resource index (CSI-RS index), or an SRS resource index (SRS-ResourceId).
可选的,第二字段可以是测量信息中的一个字段,也可以是一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果中的一个字段,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the second field may be a field in the measurement information, or a field in the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources, which is not specifically limited in this application.
需要说明的是,如果终端设备不存在切换到分离模式的需求,第二字段可以是空的,也就是第二字段不指示任何信息。终端设备继续采用共同模式。 It should be noted that if the terminal device does not need to switch to the separate mode, the second field may be empty, that is, the second field does not indicate any information. The terminal device continues to use the common mode.
实现方式4:模式切换信息通过一个或多个第三字段指示。该一个或多个第三字段与该一个或多个参考信号资源中的部分或全部参考信号资源对应,每个第三字段用于指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。Implementation method 4: The mode switching information is indicated by one or more third fields. The one or more third fields correspond to part or all of the one or more reference signal resources, and each third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
该第三字段对应的参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号是指:终端设备通过该参考信号资源对应的下行波束接收该参考信号。终端设备通过该下行波束确定相应的上行波束。如果该参考信号能够作为上行传输的参考信号,表示终端设备可以采用该上行波束进行上行传输。如果该参考信号不能够作为上行传输的参考信号,表示终端设备不能够采用该上行波束进行上行传输。也可以理解为,包含该参考信号是否能够同时作为上下传输的参考信号。又可以理解为包含该参考信号的TCI state是否能够作为上行传输的发送波束参考,或者上下行传输的发送和接收波束参考。Whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission means: the terminal device receives the reference signal through the downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal resource. The terminal device determines the corresponding uplink beam through the downlink beam. If the reference signal can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission, it means that the terminal device can use the uplink beam for uplink transmission. If the reference signal cannot be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission, it means that the terminal device cannot use the uplink beam for uplink transmission. It can also be understood as whether the reference signal can be used as a reference signal for both uplink and downlink transmissions. It can also be understood as whether the TCI state containing the reference signal can be used as a transmit beam reference for uplink transmission, or a transmit and receive beam reference for uplink and downlink transmissions.
可选的,该一个或多个第三字段为测量信息中的字段,或者为该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果中的字段。Optionally, the one or more third fields are fields in measurement information, or are fields in measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources.
可选的,一个或多个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源对应一个第三字段,第三字段用于指示该参考信号资源上的参考信号是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。Optionally, each of the one or more reference signal resources corresponds to a third field, and the third field is used to indicate whether the reference signal on the reference signal resource can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
例如,如表6所示,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括CRI#1的RSRP1、CRI#2的RSRP2、CRI#3的RSRP3和CRI#4的RSRP4。模式切换信息包括CRI#1对应的JointTxRx1,CRI#2对应的JointTxRx2,CRI#3对应的JointTxRx3以及CRI#4对应的JointTxRx4。JointTxRx1用于指示该CRI#1是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。JointTxRx2用于指示该CRI#2是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。JointTxRx3用于指示该CRI#3是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。JointTxRx4用于指示该CRI#4是否能够作为上行传输的参考信号。For example, as shown in Table 6, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources include RSRP1 of CRI#1, RSRP2 of CRI#2, RSRP3 of CRI#3, and RSRP4 of CRI#4. The mode switching information includes JointTxRx1 corresponding to CRI#1, JointTxRx2 corresponding to CRI#2, JointTxRx3 corresponding to CRI#3, and JointTxRx4 corresponding to CRI#4. JointTxRx1 is used to indicate whether the CRI#1 can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. JointTxRx2 is used to indicate whether the CRI#2 can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. JointTxRx3 is used to indicate whether the CRI#3 can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission. JointTxRx4 is used to indicate whether the CRI#4 can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
表6
Table 6
在该实现方式中,需要说明的是,每个参考信号资源对应的第三字段可以理解为每个参考信号资源对应的模式切换信息。In this implementation, it should be noted that the third field corresponding to each reference signal resource can be understood as the mode switching information corresponding to each reference signal resource.
可选的,一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括上述实现方式4中的一个或多个第三字段。可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果还包括如上述实现方式3中的第二字段。第二字段用于指示该一个或多个第三字段中的部分或全部第三字段对应的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联的参考信号的标识。该部分或全部第三字段中每个第三字段指示该第三字段对应的参考信号资源能够作为上行传输的参考信号。Optionally, the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources include one or more third fields in the above-mentioned implementation manner 4. Optionally, the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources also include the second field in the above-mentioned implementation manner 3. The second field is used to indicate the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource corresponding to some or all of the one or more third fields, or the identifier of the associated reference signal. Each third field in the part or all of the third fields indicates that the reference signal resource corresponding to the third field can be used as a reference signal for uplink transmission.
需要说明的是,上述步骤401中的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息可以同时发送,也可以分开发送,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and the mode switching information in the above step 401 can be sent simultaneously or separately, which is not specifically limited in this application.
需要说明的是,上述步骤401中终端设备可以测量更多参考信号资源的测量结果,也就是终端设备测量的参考信号资源数量可以大于终端设备上报的参考信号资源数量。It should be noted that in the above step 401, the terminal device can measure the measurement results of more reference signal resources, that is, the number of reference signal resources measured by the terminal device can be greater than the number of reference signal resources reported by the terminal device.
可选的,在ORAN系统中,上述步骤402可以由表1所示的O-RU和/或0-DU网元执行。Optionally, in an ORAN system, the above step 402 may be performed by an O-RU and/or O-DU network element shown in Table 1.
可选的,当满足第三条件时,终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息。Optionally, when the third condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device.
其中,第三条件包括以下至少一项:The third condition includes at least one of the following:
1、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;1. Among one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, the power backoff required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction;
可选的,X大于或等于0。X可以通信协议规定的最大功率回退量。当终端设备使用的功率回退量大于X,则终端设备可以向网络设备发送模式切换信息。Optionally, X is greater than or equal to 0. X may be a maximum power backoff amount specified in a communication protocol. When the power backoff amount used by the terminal device is greater than X, the terminal device may send mode switching information to the network device.
2、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;2. Among one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, the power backoff required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction;
3、终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;3. The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
4、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上 行传输;4. One or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device are restricted by MPE and at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uploading. Line transmission;
5、终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者,5. The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
6、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。6. Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
需要说明的是,上述第三条件中,该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源。It should be noted that, in the above third condition, the one or more reference signal resources are reference signal resources for the terminal device to report the measurement results.
可选的,图4所示的实施例还包括步骤401a。步骤401a可以在步骤402之前执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG4 further includes step 401a. Step 401a may be performed before step 402.
401a、网络设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息。第一配置信息用于配置终端设备上报模式切换信息。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一配置信息。401a. The network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device. The first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to report mode switching information. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first configuration information from the network device.
具体的,网络设备可以通过第一配置信息配置终端设备在上报一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果的过程中上报模式切换信息。由此可知,本实施例中,网络设备可以配置终端设备在一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果的过程中上报模式切换信息。也就是终端设备上报测量结果的信令格式可以是固定的。例如,终端设备上报测量信息,该测量信息包括一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。或者,终端设备上报一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果,该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果包括模式切换信息。Specifically, the network device can configure the terminal device to report mode switching information in the process of reporting the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources through the first configuration information. It can be seen that in this embodiment, the network device can configure the terminal device to report mode switching information in the process of reporting the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources. That is, the signaling format for the terminal device to report the measurement results can be fixed. For example, the terminal device reports measurement information, and the measurement information includes the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources and mode switching information. Alternatively, the terminal device reports the measurement results of one or more reference signal resources, and the measurement results of the one or more reference signal resources include mode switching information.
可选的,图4所示的实施例还包括步骤401b。步骤401b可以在步骤402之前执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG4 further includes step 401b. Step 401b may be performed before step 402.
401b、网络设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二配置信息。401b. The network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the network device.
第二配置信息用于一个joint/DL TCI状态列表和一个UL TCI状态列表。joint/DL TCI状态列表包括多个joint/DL TCI状态,该joint/DL TCI状态列表用于下行公共波束指示或上下行公共波束指示。UL TCI状态列表包括多个UL TCI状态,该UL TCI状态列表用于上行波束指示。例如,如果终端设备采用共同模式,该joint/DL TCI状态列表用于下行公共波束指示。如果终端设备采用分离模式,该joint/DL TCI状态列表用于上下行公共波束指示。The second configuration information is used for a joint/DL TCI state list and a UL TCI state list. The joint/DL TCI state list includes multiple joint/DL TCI states, and the joint/DL TCI state list is used for downlink common beam indication or uplink and downlink common beam indication. The UL TCI state list includes multiple UL TCI states, and the UL TCI state list is used for uplink beam indication. For example, if the terminal device adopts the common mode, the joint/DL TCI state list is used for downlink common beam indication. If the terminal device adopts the separated mode, the joint/DL TCI state list is used for uplink and downlink common beam indication.
需要说明的是,上述步骤401a所示的第一配置信息和步骤401b所示的第二配置信息可以是同一配置信息,也可以是不同配置信息,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the first configuration information shown in the above step 401a and the second configuration information shown in step 401b can be the same configuration information or different configuration information, which is not specifically limited in this application.
需要说明的是,步骤401a和步骤401b之间没有固定的执行顺序。例如,可以先执行步骤401a,再执行步骤401b;或者,先执行步骤401b,再执行步骤401a;或者,依据情况同时执行步骤401a和步骤401b,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that there is no fixed execution order between step 401a and step 401b. For example, step 401a may be executed first, and then step 401b; or, step 401b may be executed first, and then step 401a; or, step 401a and step 401b may be executed simultaneously according to the circumstances, and this application does not limit this.
可选的,图4所示的实施例还包括步骤401c,步骤401c可以在步骤401b之前执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 further includes step 401c, and step 401c may be performed before step 401b.
401c、终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息。相应的,网络设备接收来自终端设备的能力信息。401c. The terminal device sends capability information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the capability information from the terminal device.
能力信息用于指示终端设备是否支持同时配置joint/DL TCI状态列表和UL TCI状态列表。The capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports simultaneous configuration of the joint/DL TCI status list and the UL TCI status list.
本申请实施例中,终端设备测量一个或多个参考信号资源。然后,终端设备发送该一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息。该模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,该模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。由此可知,终端设备可以在上报参考信号资源的测量结果时上报模式切换信息,从而触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。In an embodiment of the present application, a terminal device measures one or more reference signal resources. Then, the terminal device sends the measurement results and mode switching information of the one or more reference signal resources. The mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode. It can be seen that the terminal device can report the mode switching information when reporting the measurement results of the reference signal resources, thereby triggering the terminal device to switch from a common mode to a separate mode. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
图5为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的一个实施例示意图。请参阅图5,方法包括:FIG5 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the information sending method and the information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG5, the method includes:
501、终端设备确定模式切换信息。501. The terminal device determines mode switching information.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。换句话说,模式切换信息用于触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当采用的上行波束和下行波束不一致;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由共同模式切换到分离模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. In other words, the mode switching information is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the uplink beam and the downlink beam that the terminal device should adopt are inconsistent; or the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from the common mode to the separate mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式。换句话说,模式切换信息用于触发终端设备从分离模式切换 到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由分离模式切换到共同模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device is to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. In other words, the mode switching information is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. to a common mode; or, the mode switching information is used to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from a separate mode to a common mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式。TCI模式包括共同模式和分离模式。例如,模式切换信息指示切换终端设备采用的TCI模式。例如,终端设备从共同模式切换至分离模式。或者,终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. The TCI mode includes a common mode and a separate mode. For example, the mode switching information indicates switching the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. For example, the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. Alternatively, the terminal device switches from the separate mode to the common mode.
可选的,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式。例如,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用共同模式。或者,模式切换信息指示终端设备采用分离模式。Optionally, the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device. For example, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the common mode. Alternatively, the mode switching information indicates that the terminal device adopts the separate mode.
一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息为第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一指示信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一指示信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备切换终端设备采用的TCI模式。In one possible implementation, the mode switching information is the first indication information, and the first indication information is used for the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first indication information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first indication information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from the separate mode to the common mode, or the first indication information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,模式切换信息包括一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识用于指示终端设备的上行传输的参考信息索引;或者模式切换信息包括一个或多个参考信号的标识,该一个或多个参考信号的标识用于指示终端设备的上行传输的参考信息索引。In another possible implementation, the mode switching information includes one or more UL TCI state identifiers, and the one or more UL TCI state identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the terminal device; or the mode switching information includes one or more reference signal identifiers, and the one or more reference signal identifiers are used to indicate the reference information index of the uplink transmission of the terminal device.
其中,UL TCI状态的标识可以指示相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。Among them, the UL TCI status identifier can indicate the corresponding uplink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam.
参考信号的标识指示终端设备根据该参考信号确定上行波束进行上行传输;也可以理解为终端设备参考具有相同参考信号的UL state进行上行传输;还可以理解为终端设备通过下行波束接收该参考信号,终端设备可以通过该下行波束确定相应的上行波束,终端设备可以通过上行波束进行上行传输。也就是如果终端设备存在切换到分离模式的需求,终端设备可以从该一个或多个UL TCI状态中选择一个UL TCI状态,并通过该UL TCI状态对应的上行波束进行上行传输。或者,终端设备可以从该一个或多个参考信号的标识中选择一个参考信号,并通过该参考信号的下行波束确定相应的上行波束,再通过该上行波束进行上行传输。由此可知,终端设备通过该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或该一个或多个参考信号的标识隐式指示或间接指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或指示终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。The reference signal identifier indicates that the terminal device determines the uplink beam for uplink transmission according to the reference signal; it can also be understood that the terminal device performs uplink transmission with reference to the UL state with the same reference signal; it can also be understood that the terminal device receives the reference signal through the downlink beam, the terminal device can determine the corresponding uplink beam through the downlink beam, and the terminal device can perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. That is, if the terminal device needs to switch to the separation mode, the terminal device can select a UL TCI state from the one or more UL TCI states, and perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam corresponding to the UL TCI state. Alternatively, the terminal device can select a reference signal from the identifiers of the one or more reference signals, and determine the corresponding uplink beam through the downlink beam of the reference signal, and then perform uplink transmission through the uplink beam. It can be seen that the terminal device implicitly indicates or indirectly indicates that the terminal device will switch from the common mode to the separation mode through the identifiers of the one or more UL TCI states, or the identifiers of the one or more reference signals, or indicates that the terminal device requests to switch from the common mode to the separation mode.
可选的,模式切换信息承载于第一信令中。可选的,第一信令为RRC信令、或MAC CE、或DCI,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the mode switching information is carried in the first signaling. Optionally, the first signaling is RRC signaling, or MAC CE, or DCI, which is not specifically limited in this application.
可选的,第一信令包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识,或包括一个或多个TCI状态标识。该一个或多个参考信号资源标识或该一个或多个TCI状态标识用于指示终端设备的下行传输的参考信息索引。Optionally, the first signaling includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or includes one or more TCI state identifiers. The one or more reference signal resource identifiers or the one or more TCI state identifiers are used to indicate a reference information index for downlink transmission of the terminal device.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识;或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个或多个参考信号资源标识中的一个参考信号资源标识,或关联一个或多个TCI状态标识中的一个TCI状态标识。Optionally, each UL TCI state identifier among the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier among the one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier among the one or more TCI state identifiers; or, each reference signal identifier among the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource identifier among the one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or is associated with a TCI state identifier among the one or more TCI state identifiers.
可选的,不同参考信号资源标识关联相同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联相同的参考信号的标识。或者,不同参考信号资源标识关联不同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联不同的参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以不同参考信号资源标识关联不同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联不同的参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, different reference signal resource identifiers are associated with the same UL TCI state identifier, or are associated with the same reference signal identifier. Alternatively, different reference signal resource identifiers are associated with different UL TCI state identifiers, or are associated with different reference signal identifiers. The examples below mainly use different reference signal resource identifiers associated with different UL TCI state identifiers, or are associated with different reference signal identifiers as an example for explanation.
可选的,不同TCI状态标识关联相同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联相同的参考信号的标识。或者,不同TCI状态标识关联不同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联不同的参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以不同TCI状态标识关联相同的UL TCI状态的标识,或关联相同的参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, different TCI state identifiers are associated with the same UL TCI state identifier, or are associated with the same reference signal identifier. Alternatively, different TCI state identifiers are associated with different UL TCI state identifiers, or are associated with different reference signal identifiers. The examples below mainly use different TCI state identifiers associated with the same UL TCI state identifier, or are associated with the same reference signal identifier as an example for explanation.
可选的,同一参考信号资源标识关联多个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联多个参考信号的标识。或者,同一参考信号资源标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以同一参考信号资源标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, the same reference signal resource identifier is associated with multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or is associated with multiple reference signal identifiers. Alternatively, the same reference signal resource identifier is associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier. The following examples mainly use the example of the same reference signal resource identifier being associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier.
可选的,同一TCI状态标识标识关联多个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联多个参考信号的标识。或者,同一TCI状态标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识。后文示例中主要以同一TCI状态标识关联一个UL TCI状态的标识,或关联一个参考信号的标识为例进行说明。Optionally, the same TCI state identifier is associated with multiple UL TCI state identifiers, or is associated with multiple reference signal identifiers. Alternatively, the same TCI state identifier is associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier. The following examples mainly use the example of the same TCI state identifier being associated with a UL TCI state identifier, or is associated with a reference signal identifier.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识与该一个或多个参考信号资源标识一一对应,即一个参 考信号资源标识对应一个UL TCI状态,不同参考信号资源标识对应不同的UL TCI状态。或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识与该一个或多个参考信号资源标识一一对应,即一个参考信号资源对应一个参考信号的标识,不同参考信号资源对应不同的参考信号的标识。Optionally, the one or more UL TCI state identifiers correspond to the one or more reference signal resource identifiers one by one, that is, one reference signal resource identifier corresponds to the one or more UL TCI state identifiers. The reference signal resource identifier corresponds to one UL TCI state, and different reference signal resource identifiers correspond to different UL TCI states. Alternatively, the one or more reference signal identifiers correspond one to one with the one or more reference signal resource identifiers, that is, one reference signal resource corresponds to one reference signal identifier, and different reference signal resources correspond to different reference signal identifiers.
可选的,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识与该一个或多个TCI状态标识一一对应,即一个TCI状态标识对应一个UL TCI状态,不同TCI状态标识对应不同的UL TCI状态。或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识与该一个或多个TCI状态标识一一对应,即一个参考信号资源对应一个TCI状态标识,不同参考信号资源对应不同的TCI状态标识。Optionally, the one or more UL TCI state identifiers correspond one-to-one with the one or more TCI state identifiers, that is, one TCI state identifier corresponds to one UL TCI state, and different TCI state identifiers correspond to different UL TCI states. Alternatively, the one or more reference signal identifiers correspond one-to-one with the one or more TCI state identifiers, that is, one reference signal resource corresponds to one TCI state identifier, and different reference signal resources correspond to different TCI state identifiers.
可选的,第一信令为PHR MAC CE。例如,如图6所示,PHR MAC CE中指示四个参考信号资源,分别是资源1(Resource1)至资源4(Resource4)。该PHR MAC CE还指示UL TCI状态标识1至UL TCI状态标识4,或参考信号标识1至参考信号标识4。资源1关联UL TCI状态标识1或参考信号标识1。资源2关联UL TCI状态标识2或参考信号标识2。资源3关联UL TCI状态标识3或参考信号标识3。资源4关联UL TCI状态标识4或参考信号标识4。可选的,模式切换信息可以是PHR MAC CE中的字段。关于模式切换信息请参阅前述步骤501中的相关介绍。Optionally, the first signaling is a PHR MAC CE. For example, as shown in FIG6 , four reference signal resources are indicated in the PHR MAC CE, namely, resource 1 (Resource 1) to resource 4 (Resource 4). The PHR MAC CE also indicates UL TCI state identifier 1 to UL TCI state identifier 4, or reference signal identifier 1 to reference signal identifier 4. Resource 1 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 1 or reference signal identifier 1. Resource 2 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 2 or reference signal identifier 2. Resource 3 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 3 or reference signal identifier 3. Resource 4 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 4 or reference signal identifier 4. Optionally, the mode switching information may be a field in the PHR MAC CE. For the mode switching information, please refer to the relevant introduction in the aforementioned step 501.
需要说明的是,上述图6所示的PHR MAC CE仅仅是一种示例,实际应用中,PHR MAC CE还可以是其他格式,具体本申请不做限定。例如,如图7所示,PHR MAC CE中指示四个参考信号资源,分别是资源1(Resource1)至资源4(Resource4)。该PHR MAC CE还指示UL TCI状态标识1至UL TCI状态标识4,或参考信号标识1至参考信号标识4。UL TCI状态标识1至UL TCI状态标识4或参考信号标识1至参考信号标识4按照PHR MAC CE指示的资源的顺序与四个参考信号资源一一对应。也就是资源1关联UL TCI状态标识1或参考信号标识1。资源2关联UL TCI状态标识2或参考信号标识2。资源3关联UL TCI状态标识3或参考信号标识3。资源4关联UL TCI状态标识4或参考信号标识4。It should be noted that the PHR MAC CE shown in FIG. 6 is only an example. In practical applications, the PHR MAC CE may also be in other formats, which is not limited in this application. For example, as shown in FIG. 7 , four reference signal resources are indicated in the PHR MAC CE, namely, resource 1 (Resource 1) to resource 4 (Resource 4). The PHR MAC CE also indicates UL TCI state identifier 1 to UL TCI state identifier 4, or reference signal identifier 1 to reference signal identifier 4. UL TCI state identifier 1 to UL TCI state identifier 4 or reference signal identifier 1 to reference signal identifier 4 correspond to the four reference signal resources in the order of the resources indicated by the PHR MAC CE. That is, resource 1 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 1 or reference signal identifier 1. Resource 2 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 2 or reference signal identifier 2. Resource 3 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 3 or reference signal identifier 3. Resource 4 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 4 or reference signal identifier 4.
上述图6和图7所示的PHR MAC CE都是以每个参考信号资源都关联一个UL TCI状态标识或一个参考信号标识为例进行介绍。实际应用中,该一个或多个参考信号资源中可以只有部分参考信号资源存在关联的UL TCI状态标识或参考信号标识,具体本申请不做限定。The PHR MAC CE shown in FIG6 and FIG7 is introduced by taking each reference signal resource as being associated with a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier as an example. In practical applications, only some of the one or more reference signal resources may have an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier, which is not specifically limited in this application.
可选的,PHR MAC CE包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识以及该一个或多个参考信号资源标识中各个参考信号资源标识对应的功率衰减量。Optionally, the PHR MAC CE includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers and a power attenuation amount corresponding to each reference signal resource identifier among the one or more reference signal resource identifiers.
可选的,PHR MAC CE中每个用于指示参考信号资源的字段所在的字节中存在一个R字段,该R字段用于指示该参考信号资源是否关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。当该R字段指示该参考信号资源关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识,则模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用分离模式。当该R字段指示该参考信号没有关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识,则模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。Optionally, there is an R field in the byte where each field for indicating a reference signal resource in the PHR MAC CE is located, and the R field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource is associated with an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal. When the R field indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts a separate mode. When the R field indicates that the reference signal is not associated with an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device adopts a common mode.
例如,当R字段的取值为1时,表示参考信号资源关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当R字段的取值为0时,表示参考信号资源不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。如图6所示,资源1所在的字节(即PHR MAC CE中的Qct5)中的第一个R字段的取值为1,表示资源1存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源1关联UL TCI状态标识1或参考信号标识1。资源2所在的字节(即PHR MAC CE中的Qct7)中的第一个R字段的取值为1,表示资源2存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源2关联UL TCI状态标识2或参考信号标识2。资源3所在的字节(即PHR MAC CE中的Qct7)中的第一个R字段的取值为1,表示资源3存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源3关联UL TCI状态标识3或参考信号标识3。资源4所在的字节(即PHR MAC CE中的Qct7)中的第一个R字段的取值为1,表示资源4存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源4关联UL TCI状态标识4或参考信号标识4。For example, when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier. As shown in FIG6, the value of the first R field in the byte where resource 1 is located (i.e., Qct5 in PHR MAC CE) is 1, indicating that resource 1 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6, resource 1 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 1 or reference signal identifier 1. The value of the first R field in the byte where resource 2 is located (i.e., Qct7 in PHR MAC CE) is 1, indicating that resource 2 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6, resource 2 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 2 or reference signal identifier 2. The value of the first R field in the byte where resource 3 is located (i.e., Qct7 in PHR MAC CE) is 1, indicating that resource 3 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6 , resource 3 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 3 or reference signal identifier 3. The value of the first R field in the byte where resource 4 is located (i.e., Qct7 in PHR MAC CE) is 1, indicating that resource 4 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6 , resource 4 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 4 or reference signal identifier 4.
再例如,当R字段的取值为0时,表示参考信号资源不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当R字段的取值为1时,表示参考信号资源关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。For another example, when the value of the R field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the R field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
可选的,PHR MAC CE中的Pi字段用于指示该一个或多个参考信号资源中的参考信号资源i是否关 联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。Optionally, the Pi field in the PHR MAC CE is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource i in the one or more reference signal resources is closed. An identifier of the UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal.
例如,当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。如图6所示,PHR MAC CE中指示四个参考信号资源,分别是资源1(Resource1)至资源4(Resource4)。该PHR MAC CE还指示UL TCI状态标识1至UL TCI状态标识4,或参考信号标识1至参考信号标识4。P1字段的取值为1,表示资源1存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源1关联UL TCI状态标识1或参考信号标识1。P2字段的取值为1,表示资源2存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源2关联UL TCI状态标识2或参考信号标识2。P3字段的取值为1,表示资源3存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源3关联UL TCI状态标识3或参考信号标识3。P4字段的取值为1,表示资源4存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。即如图6所示可知,资源4关联UL TCI状态标识4或参考信号标识4。For example, when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier. As shown in FIG6, four reference signal resources are indicated in the PHR MAC CE, namely, resource 1 (Resource1) to resource 4 (Resource4). The PHR MAC CE also indicates UL TCI state identifier 1 to UL TCI state identifier 4, or reference signal identifier 1 to reference signal identifier 4. The value of the P1 field is 1, indicating that resource 1 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6, resource 1 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 1 or reference signal identifier 1. The value of the P2 field is 1, indicating that resource 2 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6, resource 2 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 2 or reference signal identifier 2. The value of the P3 field is 1, indicating that resource 3 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6 , resource 3 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 3 or reference signal identifier 3. The value of the P4 field is 1, indicating that resource 4 has an associated UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier. That is, as shown in FIG6 , resource 4 is associated with UL TCI state identifier 4 or reference signal identifier 4.
再例如,当Pi字段的取值为0,表示参考信号资源i关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识;当Pi字段的取值为1,表示参考信号资源i不关联UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识。For another example, when the value of the Pi field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier; when the value of the Pi field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource i is not associated with the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
需要说明的是,如果终端设备不存在切换到分离模式的需求,PHR MAC CE中可以不包括该模式切换信息。也就是PHR MAC CE的格式不是固定的。It should be noted that if the terminal device does not need to switch to the separation mode, the PHR MAC CE may not include the mode switching information. In other words, the format of the PHR MAC CE is not fixed.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一信令为新定义的MAC CE,该MAC CE包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识,或包括一个或多个TCI状态标识。可选的,模式切换信息可以是该MAC CE中的字段。关于模式切换信息请参阅前述步骤501中的相关介绍。In another possible implementation, the first signaling is a newly defined MAC CE, which includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or includes one or more TCI state identifiers. Optionally, the mode switching information may be a field in the MAC CE. For the mode switching information, please refer to the relevant introduction in the aforementioned step 501.
第一信令还包括一个或多个第四字段,该一个或多个第四字段与一个或多个参考信号资源标识对应,或者,该一个或多个第四字段与该一个或多个TCI状态标识对应。每个第四字段用于指示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识是否存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。The first signaling further includes one or more fourth fields, which correspond to one or more reference signal resource identifiers, or the one or more fourth fields correspond to the one or more TCI state identifiers. Each fourth field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
例如,第四字段的取值为0,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识;第四字段的取值为1,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识不存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。For example, the value of the fourth field is 0, indicating that the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier; the value of the fourth field is 1, indicating that the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field does not have an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
再例如,第四字段的取值为1,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识;第四字段的取值为0,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源标识或TCI状态标识不存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。For another example, the value of the fourth field is 1, indicating that the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier; the value of the fourth field is 0, indicating that the reference signal resource identifier or TCI state identifier corresponding to the fourth field does not have an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
可选的,该一个或多个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源对应一个第四字段,该第四字段用于指示该参考信号资源是否存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识。不同参考信号资源对应不同第四字段。例如,如表7所示,第一信令包括一个或多个参考信号资源标识或一个或多个TCI状态标识。第一信令包括还包括该一个或多个参考信号资源中每个参考信号资源对应的第四字段,或该一个或多个TCI状态中每个TCI状态对应的第四字段。第四字段的取值为0或1,当第四字段的取值为0,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源不存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或不存在关联的参考信号的标识。当第四字段的取值为1,表示该第四字段对应的参考信号资源存在关联的UL TCI状态的标识或存在关联的参考信号的标识。Optionally, each of the one or more reference signal resources corresponds to a fourth field, and the fourth field is used to indicate whether the reference signal resource has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier. Different reference signal resources correspond to different fourth fields. For example, as shown in Table 7, the first signaling includes one or more reference signal resource identifiers or one or more TCI state identifiers. The first signaling also includes a fourth field corresponding to each of the one or more reference signal resources, or a fourth field corresponding to each TCI state in the one or more TCI states. The value of the fourth field is 0 or 1. When the value of the fourth field is 0, it indicates that the reference signal resource corresponding to the fourth field does not have an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier. When the value of the fourth field is 1, it indicates that the reference signal resource corresponding to the fourth field has an associated UL TCI state identifier or an associated reference signal identifier.
表7
Table 7
可选的,第一信令还包括第二字段,第二字段用于指示第一信令是否包括UL TCI状态标识或参考信号标识。Optionally, the first signaling also includes a second field, and the second field is used to indicate whether the first signaling includes a UL TCI status identifier or a reference signal identifier.
可选的,第一信令还包括第三字段,第三字段用于触发所述终端设备由共同模式切换到分离模式。例如,如图6所示,第一信令为PHR MAC CE,PHR MAC CE中的某个R字段用于触发终端设备从共同模 式切换到分离模式,或者,用于告知网络设备该终端设备应当采用的上行波束和下行波束不一致,或者,用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,用于触发终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,用于告知网络设备终端设备应当由分离模式切换到共同模式。Optionally, the first signaling further includes a third field, and the third field is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. For example, as shown in FIG6 , the first signaling is a PHR MAC CE, and a certain R field in the PHR MAC CE is used to trigger the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. The method is used to switch from common mode to separate mode, or to inform the network device that the uplink beam and downlink beam that the terminal device should adopt are inconsistent, or to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from common mode to separate mode, or to trigger the terminal device to switch from separate mode to common mode, or to inform the network device that the terminal device should switch from separate mode to common mode.
502、终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息。相应的,网络设备接收来自终端设备的模式切换信息。502. The terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the mode switching information from the terminal device.
可选的,当满足第一条件时,终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息。Optionally, when the first condition is met, the terminal device sends mode switching information to the network device.
其中,第一条件包括以下至少一项:The first condition includes at least one of the following:
1、终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制所需的功率回退量超过X分贝(dB),X大于或等于0;1. The power backoff required by the beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device due to MPE limitation exceeds X decibels (dB), where X is greater than or equal to 0;
2、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源对应的波束所需的功率回退量超过XdB;2. Among one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, the power backoff required for the beam corresponding to at least one reference signal resource exceeds XdB due to MPE restriction;
3、终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束受MPE限制无法用于上行传输;3. The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
4、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中受MPE限制存在至少一个参考信号资源无法用于上行传输;4. Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource cannot be used for uplink transmission due to MPE restrictions;
5、终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源对应的波束只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输;或者,5. The beam corresponding to the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device can only be used for downlink transmission but not for uplink transmission; or,
6、终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源中存在至少一个参考信号资源只能用于下行传输,而无法用于上行传输。6. Among the one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device, at least one reference signal resource can only be used for downlink transmission but cannot be used for uplink transmission.
需要说明的是,上述第一条件中,当终端设备在上报参考信号资源的测量结果的过程中上报模式切换信息,该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源。当终端设备采用PHR MAC CE上报模式切换信息,该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源,或者是PHR MAC CE中上报的参考信号资源。当终端设备采用其他信令上报模式切换信息(例如,新定义的MAC CE),该一个或多个参考信号资源是终端设备上报测量结果的参考信号资源,或者是PHR MAC CE中上报的参考信号资源,或者是配置的参考信号资源集合中任意的参考信号资源。It should be noted that, in the above-mentioned first condition, when the terminal device reports the mode switching information in the process of reporting the measurement results of the reference signal resources, the one or more reference signal resources are the reference signal resources for the terminal device to report the measurement results. When the terminal device uses PHR MAC CE to report the mode switching information, the one or more reference signal resources are the reference signal resources for the terminal device to report the measurement results, or the reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE. When the terminal device uses other signaling to report the mode switching information (for example, the newly defined MAC CE), the one or more reference signal resources are the reference signal resources for the terminal device to report the measurement results, or the reference signal resources reported in the PHR MAC CE, or any reference signal resource in the configured reference signal resource set.
本申请实施例中,终端设备确定模式切换信息。模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式。终端设备向网络设备发送模式切换信息。由此可知,终端设备上报模式切换信息,从而触发终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。从而有利于实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。In an embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determines mode switching information. The mode switching information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. The terminal device sends the mode switching information to the network device. It can be seen that the terminal device reports the mode switching information, thereby triggering the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. This is conducive to realizing the rapid switching of the terminal device to the separate mode, without the need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
图8为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的另一个实施例示意图。请参阅图8,方法包括:FIG8 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG8 , the method includes:
801、网络设备向终端设备发送第一MAC CE或第一DCI。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一MAC CE或第一DCI。801. The network device sends a first MAC CE or a first DCI to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first MAC CE or the first DCI from the network device.
一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用分离模式。In a possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode. Alternatively, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the separate mode.
在该实现方式中,可选的,终端设备接收到该第一MAC CE或第一DCI之后,终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。也就是终端设备执行TCI模式的切换,而终端设备未改变终端设备采用的上行波束和下行波束,可以理解的为终端设备的TCI模式切换成功。In this implementation, optionally, after the terminal device receives the first MAC CE or the first DCI, the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. That is, the terminal device performs the TCI mode switching, and the terminal device does not change the uplink beam and the downlink beam used by the terminal device. It can be understood that the TCI mode switching of the terminal device is successful.
本实施例中,可选的,终端设备接收到该第一MAC CE或第一DCI之后,终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。然后,终端设备通过相应的实现方式更新终端设备采用的上行波束。可选的,终端设备还更新终端设备采用的下行波束。终端设备切换到分离模式,且更新了终端设备的上行波束和下行波束,可以理解为是终端设备的TCI模式切换成功。In this embodiment, optionally, after the terminal device receives the first MAC CE or the first DCI, the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. Then, the terminal device updates the uplink beam used by the terminal device through a corresponding implementation method. Optionally, the terminal device also updates the downlink beam used by the terminal device. The terminal device switches to the separate mode and updates the uplink beam and downlink beam of the terminal device, which can be understood as the successful TCI mode switching of the terminal device.
可选的,图8所示的实施例可以独立执行,也就是图8所示的实施例不依赖于图4或图5所示的实施例。或者,图8所示的实施例也可以在前述图4或图5所示的实施例之后执行。也就是网络设备接收到模式切换信息之后,网络设备可以执行上述步骤801。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG8 can be performed independently, that is, the embodiment shown in FIG8 is not dependent on the embodiment shown in FIG4 or FIG5. Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG8 can also be performed after the embodiment shown in the aforementioned FIG4 or FIG5. That is, after the network device receives the mode switching information, the network device can perform the above step 801.
可选的,第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点。每个代码点对应一个或两个TCI状态。该一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个TCI代码点对应两个 TCI状态,该两个TCI状态包括DL TCI状态和UL TCI状态。和/或,该一个或多个代码点中至少存在一个代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到分离模式。可选的,第一MAC CE中激活的UL TCI状态包括上述图4或图5所示的实施例中上报的UL TCI状态。Optionally, the first MAC CE is further used to activate one or more TCI states, where the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points. Each code point corresponds to one or two TCI states. At least one TCI code point among the one or more code points corresponds to two TCI state, the two TCI states include a DL TCI state and a UL TCI state. And/or, the TCI state corresponding to at least one code point among the one or more code points includes a UL TCI state. Thereby implicitly indicating that the terminal device switches to a separate mode. Optionally, the UL TCI state activated in the first MAC CE includes the UL TCI state reported in the embodiment shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5 above.
可选的,该第一MAC CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态中的参考信号资源可以包括上述图4或图5所示的实施例中终端设备上报的一个或多个参考信号资源。或者,可选的,该第一MAC CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态包括上述图5所示的实施例中终端设备上报的TCI状态。可选的,该一个或多个TCI状态为DL TCI状态,或joint TCI状态。Optionally, the reference signal resources in one or more TCI states activated by the first MAC CE may include one or more reference signal resources reported by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or 5. Alternatively, optionally, the one or more TCI states activated by the first MAC CE include the TCI states reported by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5. Optionally, the one or more TCI states are DL TCI states or joint TCI states.
可选的,第一MAC CE中至少存在一个Pi字段的取值为1。该至少一个Pi字段对应的TCI状态存在UL TCI状态。也就是第一MAC CE激活的TCI状态包括UL TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到分离模式。例如,如图3A所示,第一MAC CE中的P1字段的取值为1,该P1字段对应第一MAC CE中的Oct4字节中的TCI状态标识1,该TCI状态标识1为UL TCI状态标识。Optionally, there is at least one Pi field in the first MAC CE whose value is 1. The TCI state corresponding to the at least one Pi field exists in the UL TCI state. That is, the TCI state activated by the first MAC CE includes the UL TCI state. Thereby implicitly indicating that the terminal device switches to the separation mode. For example, as shown in FIG3A , the value of the P1 field in the first MAC CE is 1, and the P1 field corresponds to the TCI state identifier 1 in the Oct4 byte in the first MAC CE, and the TCI state identifier 1 is the UL TCI state identifier.
可选的,第一MAC CE至少存在一个D/U字段的取值为0,表示该D/U字段所在的字节中激活的TCI状态为UL TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到分离模式。例如,如图3A所示,第一MAC CE中的Oct4字节中的D/U字段的取值为0,表示TCI状态标识1为UL TCI状态标识。Optionally, the first MAC CE has at least one D/U field with a value of 0, indicating that the TCI state activated in the byte where the D/U field is located is the UL TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to the separation mode. For example, as shown in FIG3A , the value of the D/U field in the Oct4 byte in the first MAC CE is 0, indicating that the TCI state identifier 1 is the UL TCI state identifier.
可选的,第一MAC CE或第一DCI包括第一字段,第一字段用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。例如,第一MAC CE中的某个R字段用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式。从而实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式。Optionally, the first MAC CE or the first DCI includes a first field, and the first field is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. For example, a certain R field in the first MAC CE is used to indicate that the terminal device switches from the common mode to the separate mode. This enables the terminal device to quickly switch to the separate mode.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备采用共同模式。In another possible implementation, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to adopt the common mode.
可选的,第一MAC CE还用于激活一个或多个TCI状态,该一个或多个TCI状态对应一个或多个代码点。该一个或多个代码点中每个代码点都只对应一个TCI状态,该TCI状态为共同TCI状态。从而隐式的指示终端设备切换到共同模式或者说工作在共同模式。Optionally, the first MAC CE is also used to activate one or more TCI states, and the one or more TCI states correspond to one or more code points. Each of the one or more code points corresponds to only one TCI state, and the TCI state is a common TCI state. This implicitly indicates that the terminal device switches to a common mode or works in a common mode.
例如,第一MAC CE中所有Pi字段的取值为0,表示第一MAC CE中的Qct4至QctN+3字节中指示的TCI状态为共同TCI状态。For example, the value of all Pi fields in the first MAC CE is 0, indicating that the TCI state indicated in the Qct4 to QctN+3 bytes in the first MAC CE is the common TCI state.
再例如,第一MAC CE中所有D/U字段的取值为1,表示第一MAC CE中的Qct4至QctN+3字节中指示的TCI状态为共同TCI状态。或者,第一MAC CE中的一个字段指示终端设备采用共同模式。例如,第一MAC CE中的R字段。For another example, the value of all D/U fields in the first MAC CE is 1, indicating that the TCI state indicated in the Qct4 to QctN+3 bytes in the first MAC CE is a common TCI state. Alternatively, a field in the first MAC CE indicates that the terminal device adopts a common mode. For example, the R field in the first MAC CE.
可选的,图8所示的实施例还包括步骤802。步骤802可以在步骤801之后执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG8 further includes step 802. Step 802 may be performed after step 801.
802、网络设备向终端设备发送第二DCI。第二DCI用于指示第一代码点。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一DCI。802. The network device sends a second DCI to the terminal device. The second DCI is used to indicate the first code point. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first DCI from the network device.
第一代码点为该一个或多个代码点中的其中一个代码点。The first code point is one of the one or more code points.
一种可能的实现方式中,第一代码点对应两个TCI状态,该两个TCI状态包括DL TCI状态和UL TCI状态。从而便于终端设备更新终端设备采用的上下行波束。In a possible implementation, the first code point corresponds to two TCI states, and the two TCI states include a DL TCI state and a UL TCI state. This facilitates the terminal device to update the uplink and downlink beams used by the terminal device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括UL TCI状态。在该实现方式中,网络设备可以只更新终端设备采用的上行波束,也就是第一代码点可以只对应该UL TCI状态。或者,网络设备可以更新终端设备采用的上行波束和下行波束,那么第一代码点对应的TCI状态还包括DL TCI状态。In another possible implementation, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes the UL TCI state. In this implementation, the network device may only update the uplink beam used by the terminal device, that is, the first code point may only correspond to the UL TCI state. Alternatively, the network device may update the uplink beam and the downlink beam used by the terminal device, then the TCI state corresponding to the first code point also includes the DL TCI state.
再一种可能的实现方式中,第一代码点对应一个共同TCI状态。该共同TCI状态用于上下行传输。实现终端设备更新终端设备采用的上下行波束。In another possible implementation, the first code point corresponds to a common TCI state. The common TCI state is used for uplink and downlink transmission, so that the terminal device updates the uplink and downlink beams used by the terminal device.
又一种可能的实现方式中,第一代码点对应的TCI状态中包括共同TCI状态。实现终端设备更新终端设备采用的上下行波束。In another possible implementation, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point includes a common TCI state, so that the terminal device updates the uplink and downlink beams used by the terminal device.
可选的,图8所示的实施例还包括步骤803。步骤803可以在步骤802之后执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG8 further includes step 803. Step 803 may be performed after step 802.
803、终端设备根据第一代码点对应的两个TCI状态中的UL TCI状态进行上行传输,或者,终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态包括的UL TCI状态进行上行传输。803. The terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state of the two TCI states corresponding to the first code point, or the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state included in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
可选的,第一代码点对应的TCI状态还包括DL TCI状态。终端设备根据该DL TCI状态进行下行传输。 Optionally, the TCI state corresponding to the first code point also includes a DL TCI state. The terminal device performs downlink transmission according to the DL TCI state.
可选的,上述步骤803具体包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数(ul-powerControl)和路径损耗参考信号(pathlossReferenceRS)进行上行传输。Optionally, the above step 803 specifically includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters (ul-powerControl) and path loss reference signal (pathlossReferenceRS) associated with the UL TCI state.
可选的,图8所示的实施例还包括步骤804,步骤804可以在步骤802之后执行。Optionally, the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 further includes step 804 , and step 804 may be performed after step 802 .
804、终端设备根据第一代码点对应的TCI状态中的共同TCI状态进行上下行传输。804. The terminal device performs uplink and downlink transmission according to the common TCI state in the TCI state corresponding to the first code point.
由此可知,上述图8所示的实施例中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一MAC CE或第一DCI。第一MAC CE或第一DCI用于指示终端设备从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者用于指示终端设备从分离模式切换到共同模式。从而实现终端设备根据第一MAC CE或第一DCI快速切换到分离模式或共同模式。无需网络设备通过RRC信令配置终端设备切换到分离模式或共同模式,降低切换时延,避免影响终端设备的传输效率。It can be seen that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 above, the terminal device receives the first MAC CE or the first DCI from the network device. The first MAC CE or the first DCI is used to instruct the terminal device to switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or to instruct the terminal device to switch from the separate mode to the common mode. Thereby, the terminal device can quickly switch to the separate mode or the common mode according to the first MAC CE or the first DCI. There is no need for the network device to configure the terminal device to switch to the separate mode or the common mode through RRC signaling, thereby reducing the switching delay and avoiding affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
图9为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的再一个实施例示意图。请参阅图9,方法包括:FIG9 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG9 , the method includes:
上述图4或图5所示的实施例中,模式切换信息指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识,对于该情况,下面结合步骤901介绍终端设备进行上行传输的实现方式。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 above, the mode switching information indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal. For this case, the implementation method of the terminal device performing uplink transmission is introduced below in combination with step 901.
901、当模式切换信息指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识,终端设备根据该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输。901. When the mode switching information indicates a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the UL TCI state identifier or the reference signal identifier.
可选的,当满足第一条件时,终端设备根据该UL TCI状态的标识或该参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Optionally, when the first condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state or the identifier of the reference signal.
其中,第一条件包括以下以下一项或多项:The first condition includes one or more of the following:
1、在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间。可选的,第一时长为K微秒、X个时隙、或M个时域符号。K、X和M均为大于或等于1的整数。例如,K为3,X为1,M为2。1. After the terminal device sends the mode switching information, a first duration has passed. Optionally, the first duration is K microseconds, X time slots, or M time domain symbols. K, X, and M are all integers greater than or equal to 1. For example, K is 3, X is 1, and M is 2.
2、在终端设备接收来自网络设备的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到模式切换信息。可选的,第二时长为N微秒。例如,第二时长为3微秒。2. After the terminal device receives the ACK from the network device, a second time period has passed, and the ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information. Optionally, the second time period is N microseconds. For example, the second time period is 3 microseconds.
3、终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端设备使用UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输。3. The terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use a UL TCI state identifier or a reference signal identifier for uplink transmission.
4、终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式。4. The terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode.
5、终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态,TCI状态中的参考信号标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号标识。5. The terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a TCI state, and the reference signal identifier in the TCI state is a reference signal identifier corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources.
该TCI状态用于终端设备进行下行传输,即该TCI状态用于指示相应的下行波束。The TCI state is used by the terminal device for downlink transmission, that is, the TCI state is used to indicate the corresponding downlink beam.
可选的,上述步骤901具体包括:终端设备通过该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含模式切换信息指示的参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示(BWP-UplinkDedicated)中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Optionally, the above step 901 specifically includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal indicating the mode switching information; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication (BWP-UplinkDedicated) configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
上述图4或图5所示的实施例中,模式切换信息指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识,对于该情况下,本申请提供终端设备进行上行传输的两种可能的实现方式。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 above, the mode switching information indicates multiple UL TCI state identifiers or multiple reference signal identifiers. In this case, the present application provides two possible implementation methods for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission.
下面结合步骤902至步骤903介绍实现方式1。Implementation method 1 is described below in conjunction with step 902 to step 903 .
902、当模式切换信息指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识,网络设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息。第四指示信息用于指示使用第一UL TCI状态的标识或第一参考信号的标识。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第四指示信息。902. When the mode switching information indicates multiple UL TCI state identifiers or multiple reference signal identifiers, the network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device. The fourth indication information is used to indicate the use of the first UL TCI state identifier or the first reference signal identifier. Accordingly, the terminal device receives the fourth indication information from the network device.
可选的,第一UL TCI状态的标识为该多个UL TCI状态中标识最大或标识最小的UL TCI状态的标识,具体本申请不做限定。第一参考信号的标识为该多个参考信号中标识最大或标识最小的参考信号的标识,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the identifier of the first UL TCI state is the identifier of the UL TCI state with the largest or smallest identifier among the multiple UL TCI states, which is not specifically limited in this application. The identifier of the first reference signal is the identifier of the reference signal with the largest or smallest identifier among the multiple reference signals, which is not specifically limited in this application.
903、终端设备根据该第一UL TCI状态的标识或该第一参考信号的标识进行上行传输。903. The terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the first UL TCI state or the identifier of the first reference signal.
可选的,上述步骤903具体包括:终端设备通过第一UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备通过包含第一参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。 Optionally, the above step 903 specifically includes: the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the first UL TCI state; or, the terminal device performs uplink transmission through the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the first reference signal; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
下面结合步骤904实现方式2。The following combines step 904 to implement method 2.
904、终端设备根据预设规则使用该多个UL TCI状态的标识中的其中一个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识中的其中一个参考信号的标识进行上行传输。904. The terminal device uses one of the multiple UL TCI state identifiers or one of the multiple reference signal identifiers for uplink transmission according to a preset rule.
可选的,预设规则包括终端设备采用该多个UL TCI状态中标识最小或最大的UL TCI状态的标识进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用该多个参考信号中标识最小或最大的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。当然终端设备还可以采用其他预设规则选择相应的UL TCI状态的标识或参考信号的标识进行上行传输,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the preset rule includes that the terminal device uses the identifier of the UL TCI state that identifies the smallest or largest UL TCI state among the multiple UL TCI states for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the identifier of the reference signal that identifies the smallest or largest reference signal among the multiple reference signals for uplink transmission. Of course, the terminal device can also use other preset rules to select the corresponding UL TCI state identifier or reference signal identifier for uplink transmission, which is not specifically limited in this application.
上述图9所示的实施例示出了针对模式切换信息指示一个UL TCI状态的标识或一个参考信号的标识的情况,示出终端设备进行上行传输的实现过程。上述图9所示的实施例还示出了针对模式切换信息指示多个UL TCI状态的标识或多个参考信号的标识的情况,示出终端设备进行上行传输的实现过程。从而实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,并更新终端设备采用的上行波束。从而提升终端设备的传输性能,避免对终端设备的传输效率的影响。The embodiment shown in FIG. 9 above shows a case where the mode switching information indicates an identifier of a UL TCI state or an identifier of a reference signal, and shows the implementation process of the terminal device performing uplink transmission. The embodiment shown in FIG. 9 above also shows a case where the mode switching information indicates multiple identifiers of UL TCI states or multiple identifiers of reference signals, and shows the implementation process of the terminal device performing uplink transmission. This enables the terminal device to quickly switch to the separation mode and update the uplink beam used by the terminal device. This improves the transmission performance of the terminal device and avoids affecting the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
图10为本申请实施例信息发送方法、信息接收方法的再一个实施例示意图。请参阅图10,方法包括:FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the information sending method and information receiving method of the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG10 , the method includes:
上述图4或图5所示的实施例中,模式切换信息指示一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识,或一个或多个参考信号的标识。在图4所示的实施例中,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态的标识关联一个参考信号资源。或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个参考信号资源。而在图5所示的实施例中,该一个或多个UL TCI状态的标识中每个UL TCI状态关联一个参考信号资源或一个TCI状态标识。或者,该一个或多个参考信号的标识中每个参考信号的标识关联一个参考信号资源或一个TCI状态标识。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 above, the mode switching information indicates one or more UL TCI state identifiers, or one or more reference signal identifiers. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, each UL TCI state identifier in the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource. Alternatively, each reference signal identifier in the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, each UL TCI state in the one or more UL TCI state identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier. Alternatively, each reference signal identifier in the one or more reference signal identifiers is associated with a reference signal resource or a TCI state identifier.
对于该情况,本申请提供终端设备进行上行传输的两种可能的实现方式。For this situation, the present application provides two possible implementation methods for the terminal device to perform uplink transmission.
下面结合步骤1001介绍实现方式1。Implementation method 1 is introduced below in conjunction with step 1001.
1001、终端设备根据终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。1001. The terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
可选的,上述步骤1001中,终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是上述图4所示的实施例中的一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个;或者,终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源是上述图5所示的实施例的第一信令中包括的一个或多个参考信号资源标识对应的参考信号资源中的一个;或者,终端设备当前使用的TCI状态是上述图5所示的实施例中的第一信令中包括的一个或多个TCI状态标识对应的TCI状态中的一个;或者,终端设备当前使用的TCI状态中的参考信号资源是上述图4所示的实施例中的一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个;或者,终端设备当前使用的TCI状态中的参考信号资源是上述图5所示的实施例中的一个或多个参考信号资源中的一个。Optionally, in the above step 1001, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 4 above; or, the reference signal resource currently used for transmission by the terminal device is one of the reference signal resources corresponding to one or more reference signal resource identifiers included in the first signaling of the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above; or, the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the TCI states corresponding to one or more TCI state identifiers included in the first signaling in the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above; or, the reference signal resource in the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 4 above; or, the reference signal resource in the TCI state currently used by the terminal device is one of the one or more reference signal resources in the embodiment shown in Figure 5 above.
可选的,当满足第二条件,终端设备根据终端设备当前传输使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。Optionally, when the second condition is met, the terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device for transmission or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
其中,第二条件包括以下一项或多项:The second condition includes one or more of the following:
1、在终端设备发送模式切换信息后经过第一时长的时间。关于第一时长请参阅前述的相关介绍。1. After the terminal device sends the mode switching information, a first time period has passed. For the first time period, please refer to the above related introduction.
2、终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息。第五指示信息用于指示终端设备使用终端设备当前使用的参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输;或者,第五指示信息用于指示终端设备使用终端设备当前使用的TCI状态关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。2. The terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device. The fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the TCI state currently used by the terminal device or the identifier of the associated reference signal for uplink transmission.
3、终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示终端设备切换到分离模式。3. The terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to switch to the separation mode.
4、在终端设备接收来自网络设备的ACK后经过第二时长的时间,ACK用于指示网络设备成功接收到模式切换信息。4. After the terminal device receives the ACK from the network device, a second period of time has passed. The ACK is used to indicate that the network device has successfully received the mode switching information.
可选的,上述步骤1001具体包括:终端设备采用该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。 Optionally, the above step 1001 specifically includes: the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device uses the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
下面结合步骤1002至步骤1003介绍实现方式2。Implementation method 2 is introduced below in combination with step 1002 to step 1003.
1002、网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息。第三指示信息用于指示TCI状态。相应的,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息。1002. The network device sends third indication information to the terminal device. The third indication information is used to indicate the TCI state. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third indication information from the network device.
该TCI状态中的参考信号的标识是一个或多个参考信号资源中的其中一个参考信号资源对应的参考信号的标识。该TCI状态用于终端设备进行下行传输,即该TCI状态用于指示相应的下行波束。The identifier of the reference signal in the TCI state is an identifier of a reference signal corresponding to one of the one or more reference signal resources. The TCI state is used for downlink transmission by the terminal device, that is, the TCI state is used to indicate the corresponding downlink beam.
1003、终端设备根据参考信号资源关联的UL TCI状态的标识或关联的参考信号的标识进行上行传输。1003. The terminal device performs uplink transmission according to the identifier of the UL TCI state associated with the reference signal resource or the identifier of the associated reference signal.
该参考信号资源是该一个或多个参考信号资源中包含第三指示信息指示的TCI状态中的参考信号的标识的参考信号资源。The reference signal resource is a reference signal resource including an identifier of a reference signal in a TCI state indicated by third indication information among the one or more reference signal resources.
可选的,上述步骤1003具体包括:终端设备采用该UL TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用包含该参考信号的标识的TCI状态关联的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输;或者,终端设备采用网络设备为终端设备配置的BWP上行指示中配置的上行功率控制参数和路径损耗参考信号进行上行传输。Optionally, the above step 1003 specifically includes: the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the UL TCI state for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal associated with the TCI state containing the identifier of the reference signal for uplink transmission; or, the terminal device adopts the uplink power control parameters and path loss reference signal configured in the BWP uplink indication configured by the network device for the terminal device for uplink transmission.
上述图10所示的实施例示出了终端设备进行上行传输的实现过程。从而实现终端设备快速切换到分离模式,并更新终端设备采用的上行波束。从而提升终端设备的传输性能,避免对终端设备的传输效率的影响。The embodiment shown in FIG. 10 above shows the implementation process of uplink transmission by the terminal device, so that the terminal device can quickly switch to the separation mode and update the uplink beam used by the terminal device, thereby improving the transmission performance of the terminal device and avoiding the impact on the transmission efficiency of the terminal device.
下面对本申请实施例提供的通信装置进行描述。The communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application is described below.
图11为本申请实施例通信装置的一个结构示意图。请参阅图11,通信装置可以用于执行图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中终端设备执行的过程,具体请参考上述方法实施例中的相关介绍。Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Fig. 11, the communication device can be used to execute the process executed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments shown in Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 8 to Fig. 10. For details, please refer to the relevant introduction in the above method embodiment.
通信装置1100包括收发模块1101和处理模块1102。The communication device 1100 includes a transceiver module 1101 and a processing module 1102 .
处理模块1102用于进行数据处理。收发模块1101可以实现相应的通信功能。收发模块1101还可以称为通信接口或通信模块。The processing module 1102 is used for data processing. The transceiver module 1101 can realize the corresponding communication function. The transceiver module 1101 can also be called a communication interface or a communication module.
可选的,该通信装置1100还可以包括存储模块,该存储模块可以用于存储指令和/或数据,处理模块1102可以读取存储模块中的指令和/或数据,以使得通信装置实现前述方法实施例。Optionally, the communication device 1100 may further include a storage module, which may be used to store instructions and/or data. The processing module 1102 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage module so that the communication device implements the aforementioned method embodiment.
通信装置模块1100可以用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备所执行的动作。通信装置1100可以为终端设备或者可配置于终端设备的部件。处理模块1102用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的处理相关的操作。收发模块1101用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的接收相关的操作。The communication device module 1100 can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment. The communication device 1100 can be a terminal device or a component that can be configured in a terminal device. The processing module 1102 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. The transceiver module 1101 is used to perform the reception-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment.
可选的,收发模块1101可以包括发送模块和接收模块。发送模块用于执行上述方法实施例中的发送操作。接收模块用于执行上述方法实施例中的接收操作。Optionally, the transceiver module 1101 may include a sending module and a receiving module. The sending module is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment. The receiving module is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
需要说明的是,通信装置1100可以包括发送模块,而不包括接收模块。或者,通信装置1100可以包括接收模块,而不包括发送模块。具体可以视通信装置1100执行的上述方案中是否包括发送动作和接收动作。It should be noted that the communication device 1100 may include a sending module but not a receiving module. Alternatively, the communication device 1100 may include a receiving module but not a sending module. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device 1100 includes a sending action and a receiving action.
可选的,该通信装置1100用于执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中终端设备所执行的动作。例如,该通信装置1100用于执行如下方案:Optionally, the communication device 1100 is used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10. For example, the communication device 1100 is used to perform the following scheme:
处理模块1102,用于测量一个或多个参考信号资源;The processing module 1102 is configured to measure one or more reference signal resources;
收发模块1101,用于发送一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于通信装置1100请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于通信装置1100请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换通信装置1100采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。The transceiver module 1101 is used to send measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
再例如,该通信装置1100用于执行执行如下方案:For another example, the communication device 1100 is used to execute the following solution:
处理模块1102,用于确定模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于通信装置1100请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100将从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于通信装置1100 请求从分离模式切换到共同模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换通信装置1100采用的TCI模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示通信装置1100采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式;The processing module 1102 is used to determine mode switching information, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from the common mode to the separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 to request to switch from the common mode to the separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the communication device 1100 will switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or the mode switching information is used for the communication device 1100 Requesting to switch from the separate mode to the common mode; or, the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100; or, the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the communication device 1100, and the TCI mode is the common mode or the separate mode;
收发模块1101,用于发送模式切换信息。The transceiver module 1101 is used to send mode switching information.
应理解,各模块执行上述相应过程的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each module executing the above corresponding process has been described in detail in the above method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
上文实施例中的处理模块1102可以由至少一个处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发模块1101可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。收发模块1101还可称为通信模块或通信接口。存储模块可以通过至少一个存储器实现。The processing module 1102 in the above embodiment can be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuit. The transceiver module 1101 can be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit. The transceiver module 1101 can also be called a communication module or a communication interface. The storage module can be implemented by at least one memory.
图12为本申请实施例通信装置的一个结构示意图。请参阅图12,通信装置可以用于执行图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中网络设备执行的过程,具体请参考上述方法实施例中的相关介绍。Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Fig. 12, the communication device can be used to execute the process executed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 8 to Fig. 10. For details, please refer to the relevant introduction in the above method embodiments.
通信装置1200包括收发模块1201。可选的,通信装置1200还包括处理模块1202。The communication device 1200 includes a transceiver module 1201. Optionally, the communication device 1200 also includes a processing module 1202.
收发模块1201可以实现相应的通信功能,处理模块1202用于进行数据处理。收发模块1201还可以称为通信接口或通信模块。The transceiver module 1201 can implement corresponding communication functions, and the processing module 1202 is used for data processing. The transceiver module 1201 can also be called a communication interface or a communication module.
可选的,该通信装置1200还可以包括存储模块,该存储模块可以用于存储指令和/或数据,处理模块1202可以读取存储模块中的指令和/或数据,以使得通信装置实现前述方法实施例。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may further include a storage module, which may be used to store instructions and/or data. The processing module 1202 may read the instructions and/or data in the storage module so that the communication device implements the aforementioned method embodiment.
通信装置模块1200可以用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备所执行的动作。该通信装置1200可以为网络设备或者可配置于网络设备的部件。收发模块1201用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的接收相关的操作,处理模块1202用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理相关的操作。The communication device module 1200 can be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment. The communication device 1200 can be a network device or a component that can be configured in a network device. The transceiver module 1201 is used to perform the reception-related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment, and the processing module 1202 is used to perform the processing-related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment.
可选的,收发模块1201可以包括发送模块和接收模块。发送模块用于执行上述方法实施例中的发送操作。接收模块用于执行上述方法实施例中的接收操作。Optionally, the transceiver module 1201 may include a sending module and a receiving module. The sending module is used to perform the sending operation in the above method embodiment. The receiving module is used to perform the receiving operation in the above method embodiment.
需要说明的是,通信装置1200可以包括发送模块,而不包括接收模块。或者,通信装置1200可以包括接收模块,而不包括发送模块。具体可以视通信装置1200执行的上述方案中是否包括发送动作和接收动作。It should be noted that the communication device 1200 may include a sending module but not a receiving module. Alternatively, the communication device 1200 may include a receiving module but not a sending module. Specifically, it may depend on whether the above solution executed by the communication device 1200 includes a sending action and a receiving action.
可选的,通信装置1200用于执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中网络设备所执行的动作。例如,通信装置1200用于执行如下方案:Optionally, the communication device 1200 is used to perform the actions performed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10. For example, the communication device 1200 is used to perform the following scheme:
收发模块1201,用于接收来自终端设备的一个或多个参考信号资源的测量结果和模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。The transceiver module 1201 is used to receive measurement results and mode switching information of one or more reference signal resources from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used by the terminal device to request switching from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
再例如,通信装置1200用于执行如下方案:For another example, the communication device 1200 is used to execute the following solution:
收发模块1201,用于接收来自终端设备的模式切换信息,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从共同模式切换到分离模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从共同模式切换到分离模式;或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备将从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于终端设备请求从分离模式切换到共同模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示是否切换终端设备采用的TCI模式,或者,模式切换信息用于指示终端设备采用的TCI模式,TCI模式为共同模式或分离模式。The transceiver module 1201 is used to receive mode switching information from the terminal device, where the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a common mode to a separate mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a common mode to a separate mode; or the mode switching information is used to indicate that the terminal device will switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used for the terminal device to request to switch from a separate mode to a common mode, or the mode switching information is used to indicate whether to switch the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, or the mode switching information is used to indicate the TCI mode adopted by the terminal device, and the TCI mode is either a common mode or a separate mode.
应理解,各模块执行上述相应过程的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each module executing the above corresponding process has been described in detail in the above method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
上文实施例中的处理模块1202可以由至少一个处理器或处理器相关电路实现。收发模块1201可以由收发器或收发器相关电路实现。收发模块1201还可称为通信模块或通信接口。存储模块可以通过至少一个存储器实现。The processing module 1202 in the above embodiment can be implemented by at least one processor or processor-related circuit. The transceiver module 1201 can be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit. The transceiver module 1201 can also be called a communication module or a communication interface. The storage module can be implemented by at least one memory.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1300。该通信装置1300包括处理器1310,处理器1310与存储器1320耦合,存储器1320用于存储计算机程序或指令和/或数据,处理器1310用于执行存储器1320存储的计算机程序或指令和/或数据,使得上文方法实施例中的方法被执行。 The embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1300. The communication device 1300 includes a processor 1310, the processor 1310 is coupled to a memory 1320, the memory 1320 is used to store computer programs or instructions and/or data, and the processor 1310 is used to execute the computer programs or instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1320, so that the method in the above method embodiment is executed.
可选的,该通信装置1300包括的处理器1310为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 1300 includes one or more processors 1310.
可选的,如图13所示,该通信装置1300还可以包括存储器1320。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13 , the communication device 1300 may further include a memory 1320 .
可选的,该通信装置1300包括的存储器1320可以为一个或多个。Optionally, the communication device 1300 may include one or more memories 1320 .
可选的,该存储器1320可以与该处理器1310集成在一起,或者分离设置。Optionally, the memory 1320 may be integrated with the processor 1310 or provided separately.
可选的,如图13所示,该通信装置1300还可以包括收发器1330,收发器1330用于信号的接收和/或发送。例如,处理器1310用于控制收发器1330进行信号的接收和/或发送。Optionally, as shown in Fig. 13, the communication device 1300 may further include a transceiver 1330, and the transceiver 1330 is used for receiving and/or sending signals. For example, the processor 1310 is used to control the transceiver 1330 to receive and/or send signals.
作为一种方案,该通信装置1300用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的操作。As a solution, the communication device 1300 is used to implement the operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
例如,处理器1310用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的处理相关的操作,收发器1330用于实现上文方法实施例中由终端设备执行的收发相关的操作。For example, the processor 1310 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment, and the transceiver 1330 is used to implement the sending and receiving-related operations performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
作为另一种方案,该通信装置1300用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的操作。As another solution, the communication device 1300 is used to implement the operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
例如,处理器1310用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的处理相关的操作,收发器1330用于实现上文方法实施例中由网络设备执行的收发相关的操作。For example, the processor 1310 is used to implement the processing-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment, and the transceiver 1330 is used to implement the sending and receiving-related operations performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
本申请还提供一种通信装置1400,该通信装置1400可以为终端设备、终端设备的处理器、或芯片。该通信装置1400可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的操作。The present application also provides a communication device 1400, which may be a terminal device, a processor of the terminal device, or a chip. The communication device 1400 may be used to execute the operations executed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
当该通信装置1400为终端设备时,图14示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。如图14所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、以及收发器。When the communication device 1400 is a terminal device, a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device is shown in Fig. 14. As shown in Fig. 14, the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, and a transceiver.
存储器可以存储计算机程序代码,收发器包括发射机1431、接收机1432、射频电路(图中未示出)、天线1433以及输入输出装置(图中未示出)。The memory can store computer program codes, and the transceiver includes a transmitter 1431, a receiver 1432, a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), an antenna 1433, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置。例如,触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。The processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, as well as to control terminal devices, execute software programs, process software program data, etc. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices. For example, touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc. are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图14中仅示出了一个存储器、处理器和收发器,在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit. The RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of explanation, only one memory, processor, and transceiver are shown in FIG14. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc. The memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发模块,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the transceiver module of the terminal device, and the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processing module of the terminal device.
如图14所示,终端设备包括处理器1410、存储器1420和收发器1430。处理器1410也可以称为处理单元,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。收发器1430也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。As shown in FIG14 , the terminal device includes a processor 1410, a memory 1420, and a transceiver 1430. The processor 1410 may also be referred to as a processing unit, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, etc. The transceiver 1430 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
可选的,可以将收发器1430中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收模块,将收发器1430中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送模块,即收发器1430包括接收器和发送器。收发器有时也可以称为收发机、收发模块、或收发电路等。接收器有时也可以称为接收机、接收模块、或接收电路等。发送器有时也可以称为发射机、发射模块或者发射电路等。Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver 1430 may be regarded as a receiving module, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver 1430 may be regarded as a transmitting module, that is, the transceiver 1430 includes a receiver and a transmitter. A transceiver may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver module, or a transceiver circuit, etc. A receiver may sometimes be referred to as a receiver, a receiving module, or a receiving circuit, etc. A transmitter may sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitting module, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
处理器1410用于执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中终端设备侧的处理动作,收发器1430用于执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中终端设备侧的收发动作。例如,处理器1410用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤401。收发器1430用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤402。可选的,收发器1430还用于执行图4所示的实施例中的步骤401a至401c。The processor 1410 is used to perform the processing actions on the terminal device side in the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10, and the transceiver 1430 is used to perform the transceiver actions on the terminal device side in the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10. For example, the processor 1410 is used to perform step 401 in the embodiment shown in Figure 4. The transceiver 1430 is used to perform step 402 in the embodiment shown in Figure 4. Optionally, the transceiver 1430 is also used to perform steps 401a to 401c in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
应理解,图14仅为示例而非限定,上述包括收发模块和处理模块的终端设备可以不依赖于图11或图14所示的结构。It should be understood that FIG. 14 is merely an example and not a limitation, and the terminal device including the transceiver module and the processing module may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 11 or FIG. 14 .
当该通信装置1400为芯片时,该芯片包括处理器、存储器和收发器。其中,收发器可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理器可以为该芯片上集成的处理模块或者微处理器或者集成电路。上述方法实施 例中终端设备的发送操作可以理解为芯片的输出,上述方法实施例中终端设备的接收操作可以理解为芯片的输入。When the communication device 1400 is a chip, the chip includes a processor, a memory and a transceiver. The transceiver may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; the processor may be a processing module or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. The sending operation of the terminal device in the example can be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the terminal device in the above method embodiment can be understood as the input of the chip.
本申请还提供一种通信装置1500,该通信装置1500可以是网络设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1500可以用于执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例由网络设备所执行的操作。The present application also provides a communication device 1500, which can be a network device or a chip. The communication device 1500 can be used to perform the operations performed by the network device in any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 8 to FIG. 10.
当该通信装置1500为网络设备时,例如为基站。图15示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括1510部分、1520部分以及1530部分。1510部分主要用于基带处理,对基站进行控制等;1510部分通常是基站的控制中心,通常可以称为处理器,用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理操作。1520部分主要用于存储计算机程序代码和数据。1530部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换;1530部分通常可以称为收发模块、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。1530部分的收发模块,也可以称为收发机或收发器等,其包括天线1533和射频电路(图中未示出),其中射频电路主要用于进行射频处理。可选的,可以将1530部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收机,将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发射机,即1530部分包括接收机1532和发射机1531。接收机也可以称为接收模块、接收器、或接收电路等,发送机可以称为发射模块、发射器或者发射电路等。When the communication device 1500 is a network device, for example, a base station. Figure 15 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the base station structure. The base station includes parts 1510, 1520 and 1530. Part 1510 is mainly used for baseband processing, controlling the base station, etc.; Part 1510 is usually the control center of the base station, which can be usually called a processor, and is used to control the base station to perform the processing operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment. Part 1520 is mainly used to store computer program codes and data. Part 1530 is mainly used for receiving and transmitting radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals into baseband signals; Part 1530 can usually be called a transceiver module, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc. The transceiver module of part 1530 can also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc., which includes an antenna 1533 and a radio frequency circuit (not shown in the figure), wherein the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for radio frequency processing. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in part 1530 may be regarded as a receiver, and the device for implementing the transmitting function may be regarded as a transmitter, that is, part 1530 includes a receiver 1532 and a transmitter 1531. The receiver may also be referred to as a receiving module, a receiver, or a receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitter may be referred to as a transmitting module, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
1510部分与1520部分可以包括一个或多个单板,每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板,各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式,也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器,或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器,或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。Part 1510 and part 1520 may include one or more single boards, each of which may include one or more processors and one or more memories. The processor is used to read and execute the program in the memory to realize the baseband processing function and the control of the base station. If there are multiple single boards, each single board can be interconnected to enhance the processing capability. As an optional implementation, multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processors at the same time.
例如,1530部分的收发模块用于执行图4所示的实施例中由网络设备执行的收发相关的过程。1510部分的处理器用于执行图4所示的实施例中由网络设备执行的处理相关的过程。For example, the transceiver module of part 1530 is used to execute the transceiver-related process executed by the network device in the embodiment shown in Figure 4. The processor of part 1510 is used to execute the processing-related process executed by the network device in the embodiment shown in Figure 4.
应理解,图15仅为示例而非限定,上述包括处理器、存储器以及收发器的网络设备可以不依赖于图12或图15所示的结构。It should be understood that FIG. 15 is merely an example and not a limitation, and the network device including the processor, memory, and transceiver may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 15 .
当该通信装置1500为芯片时,该芯片包括收发器、存储器和处理器。其中,收发器可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理器为该芯片上集成的处理器、或者微处理器、或者集成电路。上述方法实施例中网络设备的发送操作可以理解为芯片的输出,上述方法实施例中网络设备的接收操作可以理解为芯片的输入。When the communication device 1500 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver, a memory and a processor. The transceiver may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; the processor may be a processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit integrated on the chip. The sending operation of the network device in the above method embodiment may be understood as the output of the chip, and the receiving operation of the network device in the above method embodiment may be understood as the input of the chip.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有用于实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备执行的方法的计算机指令。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which computer instructions for implementing the method executed by a terminal device or a network device in the above method embodiment are stored.
例如,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得该计算机可以实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备执行的方法。For example, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method performed by the terminal device or the network device in the above method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,该指令被计算机执行时使得该计算机实现上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed by a computer, enables the computer to implement the method executed by a terminal device or a network device in the above method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上文实施例中的终端设备以及上文实施例中的网络设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the terminal device in the above embodiment and the network device in the above embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中存储的计算机程度或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中提供的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip device, including a processor, for calling a computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory so that the processor executes the method provided in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above.
一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片装置的输入对应上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中的接收操作,该芯片装置的输出对应上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中的发送操作。In one possible implementation, the input of the chip device corresponds to the receiving operation in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above, and the output of the chip device corresponds to the sending operation in any one of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10 above.
可选的,该处理器通过接口与存储器耦合。Optionally, the processor is coupled to the memory via an interface.
可选的,该芯片装置还包括存储器,该存储器中存储有计算机程度或计算机指令。Optionally, the chip device further comprises a memory, in which computer programs or computer instructions are stored.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个通用中央处理器,微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制上述图4、图5、图8至图10所示的实施例中任一实施例中提供的方法的程序执行的集成电路。上述任一处提到的存储器可以为只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。The processor mentioned in any of the above places may be a general-purpose central processing unit, a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the method provided in any of the embodiments shown in Figures 4, 5, 8 to 10. The memory mentioned in any of the above places may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM), etc.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述方便和简洁,上述提供的任一种通信装置中相关内 容的解释及有益效果均可参考上文提供的对应的方法实施例,此处不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of description, the relevant contents in any of the above-mentioned communication devices are The explanation of the content and beneficial effects can be referred to the corresponding method embodiments provided above, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the part that essentially contributes to the technical solution of the present application or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as USB flash drives, mobile hard drives, ROM, RAM, magnetic disks, or optical disks.
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。 As described above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, rather than to limit it. Although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the aforementioned embodiments, a person of ordinary skill in the art should understand that the technical solutions described in the aforementioned embodiments can still be modified, or some of the technical features therein can be replaced by equivalents. However, these modifications or replacements do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to deviate from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
Claims (43)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202311063058.6 | 2023-08-22 | ||
| CN202311063058.6A CN119521292A (en) | 2023-08-22 | 2023-08-22 | Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method and related device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025040075A1 true WO2025040075A1 (en) | 2025-02-27 |
Family
ID=94658289
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/113289 Pending WO2025040075A1 (en) | 2023-08-22 | 2024-08-20 | Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method, and related apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN119521292A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025040075A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2021243287A1 (en) * | 2020-05-29 | 2021-12-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Joint dl/ul bandwidth techniques in full-duplex mode |
| WO2022256085A1 (en) * | 2021-06-01 | 2022-12-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmission configuration indicator state mode switching |
| WO2023014847A1 (en) * | 2021-08-06 | 2023-02-09 | Intel Corporation | Radio resource management requirements for unified transmission configuration indicator framework |
-
2023
- 2023-08-22 CN CN202311063058.6A patent/CN119521292A/en active Pending
-
2024
- 2024-08-20 WO PCT/CN2024/113289 patent/WO2025040075A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2021243287A1 (en) * | 2020-05-29 | 2021-12-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Joint dl/ul bandwidth techniques in full-duplex mode |
| WO2022256085A1 (en) * | 2021-06-01 | 2022-12-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmission configuration indicator state mode switching |
| WO2023014847A1 (en) * | 2021-08-06 | 2023-02-09 | Intel Corporation | Radio resource management requirements for unified transmission configuration indicator framework |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN119521292A (en) | 2025-02-25 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| WO2023208145A1 (en) | Information transmission method and apparatus | |
| WO2023051188A1 (en) | Group management method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2023208166A1 (en) | Method for timing indication and communication apparatus | |
| US20250185025A1 (en) | Uplink transmission method and related apparatus | |
| WO2023273969A1 (en) | Resource measurement method and communications apparatus | |
| WO2024222607A1 (en) | Cell handover method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025040075A1 (en) | Measurement result sending method, measurement result receiving method, and related apparatus | |
| WO2023088114A1 (en) | Beam recovery method, beam failure detection method, and related apparatus | |
| WO2024125353A1 (en) | Determination method for path loss reference signal, and related apparatus | |
| US20250184771A1 (en) | Transmission configuration indicator tci mode configuration method, tci state indication method, and apparatus | |
| WO2025130810A1 (en) | Information sending method, information receiving method, and related apparatus | |
| WO2025020888A1 (en) | Reference signal sending method, reference signal receiving method, and related apparatus | |
| EP4564973A1 (en) | Beam determination method and related apparatus | |
| US20240284196A1 (en) | Beam usage method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025092437A1 (en) | Random access method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025232823A1 (en) | Resource determining method, resource updating method and related apparatus | |
| WO2024169535A1 (en) | Beam indication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025066903A1 (en) | Phase tracking reference signal (ptrs) port mapping method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025066735A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025232821A1 (en) | Measurement and reporting methods and related apparatus | |
| WO2025130708A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025036270A1 (en) | Beam-based communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025076698A1 (en) | Beam indication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025209487A1 (en) | Information sending method, information receiving method, and related apparatus | |
| WO2025061026A1 (en) | Data transmission method and related apparatus |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24855798 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |